WO2023087831A1 - Communication method and apparatus - Google Patents

Communication method and apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023087831A1
WO2023087831A1 PCT/CN2022/115217 CN2022115217W WO2023087831A1 WO 2023087831 A1 WO2023087831 A1 WO 2023087831A1 CN 2022115217 W CN2022115217 W CN 2022115217W WO 2023087831 A1 WO2023087831 A1 WO 2023087831A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
reference signal
uplink reference
information
type
positioning
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/115217
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
高鑫
刘梦婷
余政
刘道明
王寿林
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2023087831A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023087831A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/02Arrangements for optimising operational condition
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02Power saving arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W64/00Locating users or terminals or network equipment for network management purposes, e.g. mobility management
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/12Wireless traffic scheduling
    • H04W72/1263Mapping of traffic onto schedule, e.g. scheduled allocation or multiplexing of flows
    • H04W72/1273Mapping of traffic onto schedule, e.g. scheduled allocation or multiplexing of flows of downlink data flows
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the technical field of communication, and in particular to a communication method and device.
  • uplink-time difference of arrival (UL-TDOA) positioning technology based on the uplink.
  • the base station needs to measure the reference signal of the uplink, such as measuring the arrival time of the sounding reference signal (SRS) received from the user equipment (user equipment, UE), and the positioning management function ( location management function, LMF) and then locate the UE according to the measurement results of the base station.
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • UE user equipment
  • LMF location management function
  • the positioning process under UL-TDOA technology generally goes through the following steps: first, the LMF requests SRS configuration information from the serving base station of the UE to be located, and the serving base station feeds back the SRS configuration information to the LMF, and sends the SRS configuration information to the UE; Then the LMF indicates the SRS configuration information to other base stations; the LMF requests measurement from each base station that has obtained the SRS configuration information, and these base stations start to receive the SRS from the UE after receiving the instruction from the LMF, and measure the arrival time of the SRS; finally, these base stations will The measurement results are reported to the LMF, and the LMF uses the received measurement results to estimate the location of the UE.
  • the current positioning UE needs to support both the 3GPP communication function and the positioning function, and the UE needs to establish a radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) connection with the base station before it can be positioned. It can be seen that the current positioning process is not conducive to saving the power consumption of the UE.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and device, which are used to save power consumption of terminal equipment.
  • a first communication method which can be executed by a terminal device, or by other devices including the functions of the terminal device, or by a chip system or other functional modules, and the chip system or functional modules can realize the functions of the terminal device function, the chip system or functional module is, for example, set in a terminal device.
  • the method includes: receiving a downlink control channel from an access network device, the downlink control channel is used to schedule system information, and the downlink control channel also indicates that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type, the The first type of system information includes positioning information, the second type of system information does not include the positioning information, and the positioning information includes information for configuring uplink reference signals; if the downlink control channel indicates the system information The type is the first type, detecting the system information; sending an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information.
  • the positioning information used to configure the uplink reference signal may be included in the system information, the terminal device can obtain the positioning information by receiving the system information, and the terminal device can send the uplink to the access network device after obtaining the positioning information.
  • Reference signal without random access in other words, the terminal device can send an uplink reference signal to the access network device without random access, so that the network can locate the terminal device.
  • the system information including positioning information is the first type.
  • the first type of system information may not include the public configuration information of the cell included in the traditional system information, but only includes positioning-related information (such as positioning information ), which can reduce the capacity of the first type of system information, save transmission overhead, and also reduce the code complexity of the terminal device, thereby saving the storage space of the terminal device, and finally the terminal device can achieve positioning with lower power consumption , prolonging the service life of the terminal equipment.
  • the system information further includes information for evaluating whether the terminal device is allowed to access a cell, and/or UAC information.
  • the system information is SIB1, or it may be other system information.
  • the downlink control channel further indicates that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type, including: the downlink control channel carries downlink control information, and the downlink control information includes information used to indicate that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type; or, the scrambling sequence of the downlink control channel is the first sequence, used to indicate that the type of the system information is The first type, or, the scrambling sequence of the downlink control channel is a second sequence, which is used to indicate that the type of the system information is the second type.
  • the downlink control channel may indicate the type of the system information through information indicating the type of the system information, and the terminal device can specify the type of the system information according to the information indicating the type of the system information, and the indication method is relatively clear.
  • the downlink control channel may also indicate the type of system information through a scrambling sequence, without additional information for indication, which is beneficial to save signaling overhead.
  • the method further includes: sending an identifier of the terminal device on an uplink channel configured by the system information, where the uplink channel includes an uplink control channel or an uplink shared channel.
  • the terminal device does not perform random access. If the terminal device directly requests positioning or directly sends an uplink reference signal, the network may not be able to identify the identity of the terminal device. Therefore, the terminal device can send the identifier of the terminal device to the access network device, so that the network can clarify the identity of the terminal device, and thus locate the terminal device.
  • the uplink channel includes the uplink control channel, and the uplink control channel is used to request positioning; or, the uplink channel includes the uplink shared channel, and the method further includes: Send request information to the access network device, where the request information is used to request positioning.
  • the uplink channel includes an uplink control channel
  • the uplink control channel can also be used to request positioning in addition to carrying the identifier of the terminal device.
  • the format of the uplink control channel is the first format, and the uplink control channel in the first format can be used to request positioning.
  • the access network device receives the uplink control channel in the first format, it can be determined that there is a terminal device requesting positioning, and then According to the identification of the terminal equipment carried by the uplink control channel, the identity of the terminal equipment requesting positioning can be determined.
  • the uplink control channel is used to request positioning in addition to carrying the identity of the terminal device, so that the terminal device does not need to send additional information for requesting positioning, which can save signaling overhead.
  • the terminal device may also send request information to the access network device to request positioning, so that the access network device can clarify the purpose of the terminal device sending the identifier.
  • the uplink reference signal is determined according to an identifier of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can determine the uplink reference signal according to the identifier of the terminal device, and the terminal device also sends the identifier of the terminal device to the access network device, and the access network device can also determine the uplink reference signal according to the identifier of the terminal device, so that it can correctly Detect the uplink reference signal.
  • the access network device does not need to configure an uplink reference signal for the terminal device, which reduces the amount of information configured by the access network device and saves signaling overhead.
  • both the access network device and the terminal device can determine the uplink reference signal according to the identifier of the terminal device, so that the uplink reference signals determined by the access network device and the terminal device are consistent, and the detection success rate of the access network device is improved.
  • the uplink reference signal is determined according to an identifier of the terminal device and the positioning information.
  • the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identity of the terminal equipment, for example, including different situations. In one situation, the uplink reference signal can be determined solely according to the identity of the terminal equipment without referring to other information; in another situation, the uplink reference signal can be Determined according to the identity of the terminal equipment and other information, one type of other information is, for example, configuration information of an uplink reference signal. It can be seen that the way of determining the uplink reference signal is relatively flexible.
  • the positioning information includes one or more of the following: bandwidth information of the uplink reference signal, period of the uplink reference signal, number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal, Or, the comb-tooth information of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain.
  • the configuration information of the uplink reference signal can configure various parameters related to the uplink reference signal. The above are just a few examples. In addition to the above parameters, the configuration information can also configure other parameters of the uplink reference signal.
  • the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is the same as the identifier of the terminal device; or, the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is obtained by moduloing the identifier of the terminal device; Or, the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is part of the identifier of the terminal device.
  • the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identifier of the terminal equipment, for example, includes that the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identifier of the terminal equipment. There may be many ways to determine, which are more flexible.
  • the time domain position and/or the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device.
  • the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identity of the terminal equipment, for example, includes determining the time domain position and/or the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal according to the identity of the terminal equipment. It can be understood that the determination of the uplink reference signal according to the identifier of the terminal device may include that the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device, and/or the time domain position and/or the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the terminal device's Identification is OK.
  • the time domain position of the uplink reference signal includes the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located, and the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device Yes, the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located is the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located within one system frame.
  • the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located can be determined according to the identifier of the terminal device, so that both the terminal device and the access network device can determine the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located according to the identifier of the terminal device, and the access network device can be in the correct time slot to detect the uplink reference signal.
  • the time slots of the uplink reference signals are determined according to the identification of the terminal equipment, and the time slots of the uplink reference signals sent by different terminal equipment may be different, thereby reducing the interference between the uplink reference signals.
  • the time domain position of the uplink reference signal includes a start symbol of the uplink reference signal, where the number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal is based on the number of the terminal device identified by the identifier and first information, where the first information includes the number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal and/or the number of symbols included in a time slot.
  • the number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal can be determined according to the identifier of the terminal device and the first information, so that both the terminal device and the access network device can determine the start symbol of the uplink reference signal according to the identifier of the terminal device and the first information, and then The network access device can detect the uplink reference signal on the correct symbol.
  • the start symbol of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identifier of the terminal equipment, and the start symbol of the uplink reference signal sent by different terminal equipment may be different, thereby reducing the interference between the uplink reference signals.
  • the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal includes the frequency domain starting position of the uplink reference signal, and the number of the subcarrier where the frequency domain starting position of the uplink reference signal is located is It is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device and the comb tooth information of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain.
  • the starting position of the frequency domain of the uplink reference signal can be determined according to the identifier of the terminal device, so that both the terminal device and the access network device can determine the starting position of the frequency domain of the uplink reference signal according to the identifier of the terminal device, and the access network device can correctly
  • the uplink reference signal is detected at the frequency domain position of .
  • the starting position of the frequency domain of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identifier of the terminal equipment, and the frequency domain positions of the uplink reference signals sent by different terminal equipment may be different, thereby reducing the interference between the uplink reference signals.
  • the uplink reference signal is a positioning SRS or a ranging SRS.
  • the uplink reference signal in the embodiment of the present application may be a positioning-specific reference signal or a ranging-specific reference signal, that is, the uplink reference signal is used for positioning or ranging.
  • the embodiment of the present application may not limit the use of the uplink reference signal.
  • the uplink reference signal is, for example, an SRS, or may also be other reference signals in the uplink direction.
  • the terminal device is only used for positioning.
  • the terminal device may be a positioning-specific terminal device, for example, the terminal device only needs positioning and has no other needs such as communication.
  • the terminal device may also be a common terminal device, which is not specifically limited.
  • a second communication method is provided, which can be performed by an access network device, or by other devices including access network device functions, or by a chip system or other functional modules, and the chip system or functional modules can To realize the function of the access network device, the chip system or the functional module is set in the access network device, for example.
  • the access network device is, for example, a base station.
  • the method includes: sending a downlink control channel, the downlink control channel is used to schedule system information, and the downlink control channel also indicates that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type, and the system information of the first type
  • the information includes positioning information, the second type of system information does not include the positioning information, and the positioning information includes information for configuring an uplink reference signal; sending the system information; if the type of the system information is the The first type is to receive an uplink reference signal from a terminal device.
  • system information further includes information for evaluating whether the terminal device is allowed to access a cell, and/or UAC information.
  • the downlink control channel further indicates that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type, including: the downlink control channel carries downlink control information, and the downlink control information includes information used to indicate that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type; or, the scrambling sequence of the downlink control channel is the first sequence, used to indicate that the type of the system information is The first type, or, the scrambling sequence of the downlink control channel is a second sequence, which is used to indicate that the type of the system information is the second type.
  • the method further includes: sending an identifier of the terminal device on an uplink channel configured by the fifth information, where the uplink channel includes an uplink control channel or an uplink shared channel.
  • the uplink channel includes the uplink control channel, and the uplink control channel is used to request positioning; or, the uplink channel includes the uplink shared channel, and the method further includes: Receive request information from the terminal device, where the request information is used to request positioning.
  • the uplink reference signal is determined according to an identifier of the terminal device.
  • the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device and the positioning information.
  • the positioning information includes one or more of the following: bandwidth information of the uplink reference signal, period of the uplink reference signal, number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal, Or, the comb-tooth information of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain.
  • the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is the same as the identifier of the terminal device; or, the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is obtained by moduloing the identifier of the terminal device; Or, the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is part of the identifier of the terminal device.
  • the time domain position and/or the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device.
  • the time domain position of the uplink reference signal includes the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located, and the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device Yes, the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located is the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located within one system frame.
  • the time domain position of the uplink reference signal includes a start symbol of the uplink reference signal, where the number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal is based on the number of the terminal device identified by the identifier and first information, where the first information includes the number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal and/or the number of symbols included in a time slot.
  • the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal includes the frequency domain starting position of the uplink reference signal, and the number of the subcarrier where the frequency domain starting position of the uplink reference signal is located is It is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device and the comb tooth information of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain.
  • the method further includes: sending a first positioning request to a core network device, where the first positioning request includes the identifier of the terminal device, and is used for requesting to locate the terminal device .
  • the first positioning request includes the identifier of the terminal device, so that the core network device can send the identifier of the terminal device to the positioning server, so that the positioning server can send the identifier of the terminal device to multiple access network devices, so that multiple The access network devices can jointly realize the positioning of the terminal device.
  • the method further includes: measuring the uplink reference signal to obtain a measurement result; sending the measurement result to a positioning server, and the measurement result is used to perform a measurement on the terminal device position.
  • the access network device can receive the uplink reference signal, and measure the received uplink reference signal, and the obtained measurement result can be sent to the positioning server, so that the positioning server can determine the position of the terminal device according to the measurement result, thereby realizing the The location of the end device.
  • the uplink reference signal is a positioning SRS.
  • the terminal device is only used for positioning.
  • a third communication method which can be executed by a terminal device, or by other devices including the functions of the terminal device, or by a chip system or other functional modules, and the chip system or functional modules can realize the functions of the terminal device function, the chip system or functional module is, for example, set in a terminal device.
  • the method includes: receiving a downlink broadcast channel, where the downlink broadcast channel includes configuration information of a downlink control channel; receiving the downlink control channel, where the downlink control channel carries positioning information, and the positioning information includes configuration information for configuring an uplink reference signal information; sending an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information.
  • the terminal device obtains the positioning information through the downlink control channel, so that the terminal device not only does not need to perform random access, but also can realize positioning without receiving system information, which reduces the number of tasks that the terminal device originally needs to perform before being positioned.
  • Receiving system information and communication processes such as random access can simplify the positioning process.
  • the communication process that the terminal device needs to execute is reduced, there is no need to insert random access-related codes inside the terminal device, thereby reducing the storage space of the terminal device, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the downlink broadcast channel indicates that the type of the downlink control channel is a first type, and the downlink control information carried by the downlink control channel of the first type includes the positioning information; or,
  • the scrambling sequence of the downlink control channel is a first sequence, and the first sequence is used to indicate that the downlink control information carried by the downlink control channel includes the positioning information.
  • the downlink broadcast channel may indicate the type of the downlink control channel.
  • the terminal device may detect the downlink control channel, and if the downlink The broadcast channel indicates that the type of the downlink control channel is the second type, and the terminal device does not need to detect the downlink control channel, thereby reducing power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the type of the downlink control channel may also be indicated through the scrambling sequence of the downlink control channel. This way does not need to add additional indication information and can save signaling overhead.
  • the method further includes: sending an identifier of the terminal device on an uplink channel configured in the positioning information, where the uplink channel includes an uplink control channel or an uplink shared channel.
  • the uplink channel includes the uplink control channel, and the uplink control channel is used to request positioning; or, the uplink channel includes the uplink shared channel, and the method further includes: Send request information to the access network device, where the request information is used to request positioning.
  • the uplink reference signal is determined according to an identifier of the terminal device.
  • the uplink reference signal is determined according to an identifier of the terminal device and the positioning information.
  • the positioning information includes one or more of the following: bandwidth information of the uplink reference signal, period of the uplink reference signal, number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal, Or, the comb-tooth information of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain.
  • the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is the same as the identifier of the terminal device; or, the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is obtained by moduloing the identifier of the terminal device; Or, the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is part of the identifier of the terminal device.
  • the time domain position and/or the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device.
  • the time domain position of the uplink reference signal includes the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located, and the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device Yes, the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located is the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located within one system frame.
  • the time domain position of the uplink reference signal includes a start symbol of the uplink reference signal, where the number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal is based on the number of the terminal device identified by the identifier and first information, where the first information includes the number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal and/or the number of symbols included in a time slot.
  • the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal includes the frequency domain starting position of the uplink reference signal, and the number of the subcarrier where the frequency domain starting position of the uplink reference signal is located is It is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device and the comb tooth information of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain.
  • the uplink reference signal is a positioning SRS.
  • the terminal device is only used for positioning.
  • a fourth communication method is provided, which can be performed by an access network device, or by other devices including access network device functions, or by a chip system or other functional modules, and the chip system or functional modules can To realize the function of the access network device, the chip system or the functional module is set in the access network device, for example.
  • the access network device is, for example, a base station.
  • the method includes: sending a downlink broadcast channel, where the downlink broadcast channel includes configuration information of a downlink control channel; sending the downlink control channel, where the downlink control channel carries positioning information, and the positioning information includes configuration information for configuring an uplink reference signal Information; according to the positioning information, receive an uplink reference signal from a terminal device.
  • the downlink broadcast channel indicates that the type of the downlink control channel is a first type, and the downlink control information carried by the downlink control channel of the first type includes the positioning information; or,
  • the scrambling sequence of the downlink control channel is a first sequence, and the first sequence is used to indicate that the downlink control information carried by the downlink control channel includes the positioning information.
  • the method further includes: receiving the identifier of the terminal device on an uplink channel configured by the positioning information, where the uplink channel includes an uplink control channel or an uplink shared channel.
  • the uplink channel includes the uplink control channel, and the uplink control channel is used to request positioning; or, the uplink channel includes the uplink shared channel, and the method further includes: Receive request information from the terminal device, where the request information is used to request positioning.
  • the uplink reference signal is determined according to an identifier of the terminal device.
  • the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device and the positioning information.
  • the positioning information includes one or more of the following: bandwidth information of the uplink reference signal, period of the uplink reference signal, number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal, Or, the comb-tooth information of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain.
  • the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is the same as the identifier of the terminal device; or, the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is obtained by moduloing the identifier of the terminal device; Or, the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is part of the identifier of the terminal device.
  • the time domain position and/or the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device.
  • the time domain position of the uplink reference signal includes the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located, and the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device Yes, the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located is the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located within one system frame.
  • the time domain position of the uplink reference signal includes a start symbol of the uplink reference signal, where the number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal is based on the number of the terminal device identified by the identifier and first information, where the first information includes the number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal and/or the number of symbols included in a time slot.
  • the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal includes the frequency domain starting position of the uplink reference signal, and the number of the subcarrier where the frequency domain starting position of the uplink reference signal is located is It is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device and the comb tooth information of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain.
  • the method further includes: sending a first positioning request to a core network device, where the first positioning request includes the identifier of the terminal device, and is used for requesting to locate the terminal device .
  • the method further includes: measuring the uplink reference signal to obtain a measurement result; sending the measurement result to a positioning server, and the measurement result is used to perform a measurement on the terminal device position.
  • the uplink reference signal is a positioning SRS.
  • the terminal device is only used for positioning.
  • a fifth aspect provides a communication system, the communication system includes a terminal device and an access network device, the access network device is, for example, the access network device described in the first aspect and/or the second aspect, and the terminal device is, for example, It is the terminal device described in the first aspect and/or the second aspect.
  • the access network device is configured to send a downlink control channel
  • the terminal device is configured to receive the downlink control channel from the access network device
  • the downlink control channel is used to schedule system information
  • the The downlink control channel also indicates that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type, the system information of the first type includes positioning information, the system information of the second type does not include the positioning information, and the system information of the second type does not include the positioning information.
  • the positioning information includes information for configuring an uplink reference signal; the access network device is further configured to send the system information, and the terminal device is further configured to transmit the system information if the downlink control channel indicates that the type of the system information is The first type is to detect the system information; the terminal device is further configured to send an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information, and the access network device is further configured to if the The type of the system information is the first type, and an uplink reference signal is received from the terminal device.
  • the communication system further includes the positioning server described in the first aspect and/or the second aspect.
  • a communication system includes a terminal device and an access network device.
  • the access network device is, for example, the access network device described in the third aspect and/or the fourth aspect.
  • the terminal device is, for example, It is the terminal device described in the third aspect and/or the fourth aspect.
  • the access network device is configured to send a downlink broadcast channel
  • the terminal device is configured to receive the downlink broadcast channel
  • the downlink broadcast channel includes configuration information of a downlink control channel
  • the access network device It is also used to send the downlink control channel
  • the terminal device is also used to receive the downlink control channel
  • the downlink control channel carries positioning information, and the positioning information includes information for configuring an uplink reference signal
  • the The terminal device is further configured to send an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information
  • the access network device is further configured to receive an uplink reference signal from the terminal device according to the positioning information.
  • the communication system further includes the positioning server described in the third aspect and/or the fourth aspect.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the communication device may be the terminal device described in any one of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.
  • the communication device has the functions of the terminal device described above.
  • the communication device is, for example, a terminal device, or a functional module in the terminal device, such as a baseband device or a chip system.
  • the communication device includes a baseband device and a radio frequency device.
  • the communication device includes a processing unit (also called a processing module sometimes) and a transceiver unit (also called a transceiver module sometimes).
  • the transceiver unit can realize the sending function and the receiving function. When the transceiver unit realizes the sending function, it can be called the sending unit (sometimes also called the sending module).
  • the transceiver unit When the transceiver unit realizes the receiving function, it can be called the receiving unit (sometimes also called receiving module).
  • the sending unit and the receiving unit can be the same functional module, which is called the transceiver unit, and this functional module can realize the sending function and the receiving function; or, the sending unit and the receiving unit can be different functional modules, and the transceiver unit is for these A general term for functional modules.
  • the transceiver unit is configured to receive a downlink control channel from an access network device, the downlink control channel is used to schedule system information, and the downlink control channel also indicates the system information
  • the type is the first type or the second type, the system information of the first type includes positioning information, the system information of the second type does not include the positioning information, and the positioning information includes information;
  • the processing unit is configured to detect the system information through the transceiver unit if the downlink control channel indicates that the type of the system information is the first type; the processing unit is also configured to detect the system information according to the the positioning information, and send an uplink reference signal to the access network device through the transceiver unit.
  • the transceiver unit is configured to receive a downlink control channel from an access network device, the downlink control channel is used to schedule system information, and the downlink control channel also indicates that the type of the system information is the first type or the second Two types, the system information of the first type includes positioning information, the system information of the second type does not include the positioning information, and the positioning information includes information for configuring uplink reference signals; the transceiver unit further It is configured to detect the system information if the downlink control channel indicates that the type of the system information is the first type; the transceiver unit is further configured to send the location information to the access network device Uplink reference signal.
  • the transceiver unit is configured to receive a downlink broadcast channel, and the downlink broadcast channel includes configuration information of a downlink control channel; the transceiver unit is also configured to receive the downlink control channel, The downlink control channel carries positioning information, and the positioning information includes information for configuring an uplink reference signal; the processing unit is configured to send an uplink signal to the access network device through the transceiver unit according to the positioning information reference signal.
  • the transceiver unit is configured to receive a downlink broadcast channel, the downlink broadcast channel includes configuration information of a downlink control channel; the transceiver unit is also configured to receive the downlink control channel, and the downlink control channel carries positioning information
  • the positioning information includes information for configuring an uplink reference signal; the transceiving unit is further configured to send an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information.
  • the communication device further includes a storage unit (sometimes referred to as a storage module), and the processing unit is configured to be coupled with the storage unit and execute programs or An instruction to enable the communication device to execute the function of the terminal device described in any one of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.
  • a storage unit sometimes referred to as a storage module
  • a communication device may be the access network device described in any one of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.
  • the communication device has the functions of the above-mentioned access network equipment.
  • the communication device is, for example, an access network device, or a functional module in the access network device, such as a baseband device or a chip system.
  • the communication device includes a baseband device and a radio frequency device.
  • the communication device includes a processing unit (also called a processing module sometimes) and a transceiver unit (also called a transceiver module sometimes).
  • a processing unit also called a processing module sometimes
  • a transceiver unit also called a transceiver module sometimes
  • the transceiver unit is configured to send a downlink control channel, the downlink control channel is used to schedule system information, and the downlink control channel also indicates that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type, the system information of the first type includes positioning information, the system information of the second type does not include the positioning information, and the positioning information includes information for configuring uplink reference signals; the sending and receiving The unit is further configured to send the system information; the processing unit is configured to receive an uplink reference signal from a terminal device through the transceiver unit if the type of the system information is the first type.
  • the transceiver unit is configured to send a downlink control channel, the downlink control channel is used to schedule system information, and the downlink control channel also indicates that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type, the The first type of system information includes positioning information, the second type of system information does not include the positioning information, and the positioning information includes information for configuring an uplink reference signal; the transceiver unit is further configured to send the System information: the transceiving unit is further configured to receive an uplink reference signal from a terminal device if the type of the system information is the first type.
  • the transceiver unit is configured to send a downlink broadcast channel, and the downlink broadcast channel includes configuration information of a downlink control channel; the transceiver unit is also configured to send the downlink control channel,
  • the downlink control channel carries positioning information, and the positioning information includes information for configuring an uplink reference signal;
  • the processing unit is configured to receive an uplink reference signal from a terminal device through the transceiver unit according to the positioning information.
  • the transceiver unit is configured to send a downlink broadcast channel, and the downlink broadcast channel includes configuration information of a downlink control channel; the transceiver unit is also configured to send the downlink control channel, and the downlink control channel carries positioning information , the positioning information includes information for configuring an uplink reference signal; the transceiving unit is further configured to receive an uplink reference signal from a terminal device according to the positioning information.
  • the communication device further includes a storage unit (sometimes referred to as a storage module), and the processing unit is configured to be coupled with the storage unit and execute programs or An instruction to enable the communication device to perform the function of the access network device described in any one of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.
  • a storage unit sometimes referred to as a storage module
  • a computer-readable storage medium the computer-readable storage medium is used to store computer programs or instructions, and when it is executed, the method performed by the terminal device or the access network device in the above-mentioned aspects be realized.
  • a computer program product containing instructions which enables the methods described in the above aspects to be implemented when it is run on a computer.
  • FIG. 1A is a flow chart of UE performing uplink positioning
  • FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of determining the target to be positioned by the LMF
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture applied in an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 3 is a flow chart of the first communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart of a second communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is determined by the UE in the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a start symbol of an uplink reference signal determined by a UE in an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of the frequency domain position where the uplink reference signal is determined by the UE in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of protocol stacks of UE, base station and AMF;
  • Fig. 9 is a schematic diagram of the protocol stack after tailoring in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart of a third communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart of a fourth communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 12 is a schematic diagram of a device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 13 is a schematic diagram of another device provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the method and device provided by the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, for example, the fifth generation (5th generation, 5G), new radio (new radio, NR), long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE), Internet of Things (internet of things, IoT), wireless fidelity (wireless-fidelity, WiFi), 3GPP related wireless communication, or other wireless communication that may appear in the future, etc.
  • 5G fifth generation
  • new radio new radio
  • LTE long term evolution
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • WiFi wireless fidelity
  • 3GPP related wireless communication or other wireless communication that may appear in the future, etc.
  • the terminal device is a device with wireless transceiver function, which can be a fixed device, a mobile device, a handheld device (such as a mobile phone), a wearable device, a vehicle-mounted device, or a wireless device built into the above-mentioned devices (such as , communication module, modem, or chip system, etc.).
  • the terminal device is used to connect people, things, machines, etc., and can be widely used in various scenarios, including but not limited to the following scenarios: cellular communication, device-to-device communication (device-to-device, D2D), car-to-everything (vehicle to everything, V2X), machine-to-machine/machine-type communications (machine-to-machine/machine-type communications, M2M/MTC), Internet of things (Internet of things, IoT), virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) , augmented reality (augmented reality, AR), industrial control (industrial control), unmanned driving (self driving), telemedicine (remote medical), smart grid (smart grid), smart furniture, smart office, smart wear, smart transportation , Terminal equipment for smart cities, drones, robots and other scenarios.
  • cellular communication device-to-device communication
  • D2D device-to-device, D2D
  • car-to-everything vehicle to everything
  • V2X machine-to-machine/mach
  • the terminal equipment may sometimes be referred to as user equipment (user equipment, UE), terminal, access station, UE station, remote station, wireless communication device, or user device, etc.
  • user equipment user equipment
  • UE user equipment
  • access station UE station
  • remote station wireless communication device
  • wireless communication device or user device, etc.
  • the terminal device is taken as an example for description.
  • the network devices in this embodiment of the present application may include, for example, access network devices and/or core network devices.
  • the access network device is a device with a wireless transceiver function, and is used for communicating with the terminal device.
  • the access network equipment includes but is not limited to a base station (BTS, Node B, eNodeB/eNB, or gNodeB/gNB), a transmission reception point (TRP), a third generation partnership project (3rd generation partnership project, 3GPP ) Subsequent evolved base stations, access nodes in wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) systems, wireless relay nodes, wireless backhaul nodes, etc.
  • the base station may be: a macro base station, a micro base station, a pico base station, a small station, a relay station, and the like. Multiple base stations can support networks of the same access technology or networks of different access technologies.
  • a base station may contain one or more co-sited or non-co-sited transmission and reception points.
  • the access network device may also be a wireless controller, a centralized unit (centralized unit, CU), and/or a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU) in a cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, CRAN) scenario.
  • the access network device may also be a server or the like.
  • a network device in a vehicle to everything (V2X) technology may be a road side unit (RSU).
  • V2X vehicle to everything
  • RSU road side unit
  • the base station is used as an example for the access network device to be described.
  • the base station can communicate with the terminal equipment, and can also communicate with the terminal equipment through the relay station.
  • a terminal device can communicate with multiple base stations in different access technologies.
  • the core network equipment is used to implement functions such as mobility management, data processing, session management, policy and charging.
  • the names of devices implementing core network functions in systems with different access technologies may be different, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the core network equipment includes: access and mobility management function (access and mobility management function, AMF), session management function (session management function, SMF), policy control function (policy control function, PCF) Or user plane function (user plane function, UPF), etc.
  • the communication device for realizing the function of the network device may be a network device, or a device capable of supporting the network device to realize the function, such as a chip system, and the device may be installed in the network device.
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application is described by taking the network device as an example for realizing the function of the network device.
  • nouns for the number of nouns, unless otherwise specified, it means “singular noun or plural noun", that is, “one or more". “At least one” means one or more, and “plurality” means two or more. "And/or” describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there can be three types of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. The character “/" generally indicates that the contextual objects are an "or” relationship. For example, A/B means: A or B. “At least one of the following" or similar expressions refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single or plural items.
  • At least one item (piece) of a, b, or c means: a, b, c, a and b, a and c, b and c, or a and b and c, where a, b, c Can be single or multiple.
  • first and second mentioned in this embodiment of the application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the size, content, order, timing, priority, or importance of multiple objects.
  • first sequence and the second sequence can be the same sequence or different sequences, and this name does not indicate the size, content, sending order, priority or importance of the two sequences, etc. s difference.
  • numbering of the steps in the various embodiments introduced in this application is only for distinguishing different steps, and is not used to limit the order of the steps. For example, S301 may occur before S302, or may occur after S302, or may occur simultaneously with S302.
  • UE needs to access the network first to perform positioning, that is, the UE needs to perform cell search and random access first, establish an RRC connection with the base station, and then initiate a positioning request. After initiating a positioning request, the UE can obtain information required for positioning from the base station, such as SRS configuration information, and then the UE sends a positioning reference signal to the base station, and the network can position the UE.
  • FIG. 1A is a flow chart of performing uplink positioning for a UE, which is based on UL-TDOA technology.
  • the serving base station of the UE sends a synchronization signal and a physical broadcast channel block (synchronization signal and PBCH block, SSB).
  • a synchronization signal and a physical broadcast channel block synchronization signal and PBCH block, SSB.
  • the UE receives the SSB from the serving base station.
  • the SSB can carry a master information block (master information block, MIB), so that the UE can obtain the MIB, and the MIB can carry configuration information of a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH).
  • MIB master information block
  • PDCH physical downlink control channel
  • the serving base station sends a PDCCH.
  • the UE receives the PDCCH from the serving base station.
  • the UE can detect the PDCCH according to the configuration information of the PDCCH, and the PDCCH can schedule a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH), and the PDSCH can carry a system information block 1 (system information block, SIB1).
  • PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
  • SIB1 system information block 1
  • the serving base station sends the PDSCH.
  • the UE receives the PDSCH from the serving base station.
  • the UE can receive the PDSCH according to the scheduling of the PDCCH, so as to obtain the SIB1 carried by the PDSCH.
  • the SIB1 may configure random access resources required by the UE to initiate random access, for example, a random access preamble (preamble) is configured.
  • UE can initiate random access.
  • S101-S103 can be regarded as a cell search process, and the following S104-S107 is a random access process of the UE.
  • the UE sends a physical random access channel (physical random access channel, PRACH) to the serving base station.
  • PRACH physical random access channel
  • the serving base station receives the PRACH from the UE.
  • the UE sends a preamble to the serving base station through the PRACH, and the serving base station receives the preamble from the UE.
  • the preamble may also be called the first message (Msg1) in the random access process.
  • the serving base station sends a random access response (random access response, RAR) to the UE.
  • RAR random access response
  • the UE receives the RAR from the serving base station.
  • the RAR can also be called the second message (Msg2) in the random access procedure.
  • the UE sends an RRC setup request (RRC setup request) message to the serving base station.
  • RRC setup request the RRC establishment request message
  • the RRC establishment request message may also be referred to as the third message (Msg3) in the random access procedure.
  • the serving base station sends an RRC setup response (RRC setup response) message to the UE.
  • RRC setup response the UE receives an RRC establishment response message from the serving base station.
  • the RRC setup response message may also be referred to as the fourth message (Msg4) in the random access procedure.
  • the random access process of the UE is completed, and if the random access is successful, the UE establishes an RRC connection with the base station.
  • the positioning process of the UE is started, that is, the following S108-S117 are the positioning process.
  • the UE sends a message for requesting positioning to the AMF.
  • the AMF receives a message for requesting positioning from the UE.
  • the AMF sends a message for requesting positioning to the LMF.
  • the LMF receives a message for requesting positioning from the AMF.
  • the LMF sends a location information request message to the serving base station.
  • the serving base station receives a location information request message from the LMF.
  • the location information request message is used to request to obtain SRS configuration information.
  • the serving base station sends a positioning information response to the LMF.
  • the LMF receives a positioning information response from the serving base station.
  • the positioning information response may carry SRS configuration information.
  • the LMF may send the SRS configuration information to multiple base stations, and the multiple base stations jointly locate the UE.
  • the serving base station sends the SRS configuration information to the UE.
  • the UE receives SRS configuration information from the serving base station.
  • the LMF sends measurement requests to multiple base stations.
  • the multiple base stations include the serving base station, and correspondingly, the serving base station receives the measurement request from the LMF.
  • the UE sends the SRS.
  • the serving base station receives the SRS from the UE.
  • these multiple base stations can also receive the SRS from the UE in addition to the serving base station.
  • the serving base station sends the measurement result to the LMF.
  • the LMF receives the measurement result from the serving base station.
  • the serving base station measures the SRS from the UE, for example, the measurement result includes the arrival time of the SRS, and the serving base station may send the measurement result to the LMF.
  • the LMF sends the SRS configuration information to multiple base stations, in addition to the serving base station, these multiple base stations can also receive SRS from the UE, and these multiple base stations can also measure the SRS, and send their respective measurement results to the LMF , then the LMF can obtain multiple measurement results.
  • the LMF estimates the location of the UE. After the LMF has received measurement results from multiple base stations, the LMF can estimate the location of the UE according to the multiple measurement results.
  • a base station receives the measurement results.
  • any one of the other two base stations measures The time difference between the SRS arrival time measured by the reference base station and the SRS arrival time measured by the reference base station is ⁇ t i1 .
  • the target to be positioned is located on the hyperbola with the two base stations as the focus, then the following equations can be listed:
  • c represents the speed of light
  • x UE and y UE there are only two unknowns (x UE and y UE ) in these two formulas, then these two unknowns can be solved by combining formula 1 and formula 2, so that the position to be positioned can be obtained
  • the location coordinates of the UE It should be noted that due to the existence of measurement errors, the above equations generally do not have a closed-form solution. In engineering, classic optimization algorithms such as least squares algorithm or particle swarm filter algorithm are used to estimate the optimal solution of the above equations.
  • FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of determining a target to be positioned for the LMF. For example, if there are 3 base stations participating in positioning, a hyperbola can be determined based on any two base stations, and a total of 3 hyperbolas can be determined, and the intersection point of these 3 hyperbolas is the location of the UE to be positioned.
  • UE needs to establish an RRC connection with the base station before it can be positioned. That is, if a UE wants to support UL-TDOA positioning technology, it needs to complete basic communication procedures such as cell search and random access before obtaining SRS. configuration information. For the UE, if it needs to support both the 3GPP communication function and the positioning function, a large number of codes need to be built into the UE to support it, and when the amount of codes increases, a larger storage space needs to be set in the UE for storage. , and the larger the storage space, the higher the power consumption of the UE. It can be seen that the current positioning process is not conducive to saving the power consumption of the UE.
  • the positioning information used to configure the uplink reference signal may be included in the system information, the UE can obtain the positioning information by receiving the system information, and the UE can send the uplink reference signal to the access network device after obtaining the positioning information , without completing random access, or in other words, the UE can send an uplink reference signal to the access network device without performing random access, so that the network can locate the UE.
  • the communication procedures such as random access that the UE originally needs to perform before being positioned are reduced, and the positioning process can be simplified.
  • the system information including positioning information is the first type.
  • the first type of system information may not include the public configuration information of the cell included in the traditional system information, but only includes positioning-related information (such as positioning information ), which can reduce the capacity of the first type of system information, save transmission overhead, and also reduce the code complexity of the UE, thereby saving the storage space of the UE.
  • the UE can achieve positioning with lower power consumption, extending the UE lifetime.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture applied in the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 2 includes core network equipment, access network equipment and UE.
  • the access network device and the core network device can jointly realize the positioning of the UE.
  • the core network equipment includes, for example, a location server and an AMF.
  • the location server may be different, for example, the location server includes LMF, enhanced serving mobile location center (enhanced serving mobile location center, E-SMLC) or secure user plane location platform (SUPL location platform, SLP).
  • E-SMLC enhanced serving mobile location center
  • SLP secure user plane location platform
  • the location server (such as E-SMLC, SLP or LMF) can be used to obtain measurement results from one or more positioning units (such as access network equipment), and may also obtain other location-related information, and can provide positioning units Assistance data to help determine the location of the target device.
  • the access network devices in Fig. 2 include, for example, access network device 1, access network device 2, and so on.
  • the UE is connected to the access network device through the Uu interface, the access network device and the AMF are connected through the next generation (NG)-C interface, the access network devices are connected through the Xn interface, and the LMF and AMF They are connected through NLs interface.
  • NG next generation
  • the LMF is a device or component deployed in the core network to provide the positioning function for the UE.
  • the access network device in FIG. 2 is, for example, a base station.
  • the access network device corresponds to different devices in different systems, for example, in the 4G system, it may correspond to eNB, and in the 5G system, it may correspond to the access network device in 5G, such as gNB.
  • the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to future mobile communication systems, so the access network equipment in FIG. 2 can also correspond to network equipment in future mobile communication systems.
  • the embodiment of the present application takes the access network device as a base station as an example.
  • the access network device may also be a device such as an RSU.
  • Access network device 1 and access network device 2 in FIG. 2 may be of the same type, for example, both are eNBs; or, access network device 1 and access network device 2 in FIG. 2 may also be of different types
  • the access network device 1 is an eNB
  • the access network device 2 is a gNB.
  • uplink reference signal uplink positioning reference signal
  • positioning reference signal represent the same feature, that is, they represent the uplink reference signal used for positioning, which will not be described in the following Then make a clear distinction.
  • uplink reference signal is an SRS
  • SRS signal positioning SRS signal
  • SRS also represent the same feature, that is, they represent SRS for positioning.
  • the positioning server can also be called a positioning device, a location server, a positioning service center, or a positioning processing center.
  • the positioning server can determine the position of the UE according to the measurement results of the access network equipment, and there is no restriction on its name.
  • the provided method is applied to the network architecture shown in FIG. 2 as an example.
  • the UE described in the following embodiments is, for example, the UE in the network architecture shown in FIG. 2
  • the access network device described in the following embodiments is, for example, the access network device 1 in the network architecture shown in FIG.
  • the core network device described in the various embodiments below is, for example, the AMF in the network architecture shown in Figure 2
  • the positioning server described in the various embodiments below is, for example, the network architecture shown in Figure 2 LMF, E-SMLC or SLP in.
  • the core network device is the AMF and the location server is the LMF as an example.
  • FIG. 3 is a flow chart of the method.
  • the access network device sends a downlink control channel.
  • the UE receives the downlink control channel from the access network device.
  • the downlink control channel can be used to schedule system information, and it can be understood that the downlink control channel can schedule a PDSCH, and the PDSCH can carry system information.
  • the downlink control channel is, for example, PDCCH.
  • the PDCCH carries downlink control information (DCI), and the PDCCH schedules the PDSCH. Specifically, the DCI schedules the PDSCH.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • the PDCCH may indicate the type of the scheduled system information, for example, indicate that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type, for example, all types except the first type belong to the second type.
  • the first type of system information includes, for example, positioning information, while the second type of system information does not include positioning information.
  • the positioning information can be used for positioning, for example, the positioning information includes information for configuring an uplink reference signal, and the uplink reference signal can be used for positioning.
  • the first type is, for example, a positioning-specific type
  • the second type is, for example, a non-positioning-specific type.
  • the PDCCH indicates the type of system information, and there may be different indication manners.
  • an indication manner is that the DCI carried by the PDCCH may include indication information, and the indication information may indicate that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type.
  • reserved (reserved) bits in the DCI may be used to carry indication information, thereby indicating the type of system information. For example, there is still a reserved space of 15 bits to 17 bits in the DCI scrambled by the system information radio network temporary identity (SI-RNTI) at present, and the indication information can occupy one or more of them. bits. For example, the indication information occupies 1 bit.
  • SI-RNTI system information radio network temporary identity
  • the UE can determine the type of system information according to the indication information included in the DCI.
  • another indication manner may be indicated by using a scrambling sequence.
  • the scrambling sequence of the PDCCH (or DCI) is the first sequence, it indicates that the type of system information is the first type; if the scrambling sequence of the PDCCH (or DCI) is the second sequence, it indicates that the system The type of information is the second type.
  • the first sequence is, for example, a newly defined scrambling sequence, for example called positioning (POS)-SI-RNTI, and the second sequence is, for example, SI-RNTI.
  • the UE can determine the type of system information according to the scrambling sequence used to scramble the PDCCH.
  • the access network device sends system information.
  • the type of the system information indicated by the downlink control channel is the first type, the UE detects the system information.
  • the access network device After sending the PDCCH, the access network device will send the PDSCH. If the type of system information indicated by the PDCCH is the first type, the UE may detect the PDSCH according to the scheduling of the PDCCH, and the PDSCH may carry the system information. At this time, the PDSCH carries the system information of the first type. However, if the type of system information indicated by the PDCCH is the second type, the UE does not need to detect the PDSCH, thereby saving power consumption of the UE.
  • the above-mentioned UEs are, for example, UEs that need positioning, or UEs that need positioning and have high requirements for power consumption and/or delay, or UEs that need positioning and do not have high requirements for communication; UEs, such as UEs that do not require positioning, or UEs that require positioning but do not require high power consumption and/or delay, or UEs that require communication, the response mode of such UEs is opposite to that of the above-mentioned UEs, For example, if the PDCCH indicates that the type of system information is the first type, such UEs do not need to detect the PDSCH, and if the PDCCH indicates that the type of system information is the second type, then such UEs can detect the PDSCH according to the scheduling of the PDCCH to receive the second Two types of system information, so as to further perform processes such as random access.
  • the embodiment of the present application mainly introduces the content related to the first type of system information.
  • the first type of system information may include positioning information, and the positioning information may include information for configuring uplink reference signals, for example, the information for configuring uplink reference signals is referred to as first configuration information.
  • the positioning information only includes the first configuration information, and at this time the positioning information and the first configuration information may be the same concept; or, the positioning information includes other information for realizing the positioning function in addition to the first configuration information.
  • the first configuration information includes, for example, one or more of the following items: bandwidth information of the uplink reference signal, period of the uplink reference signal, number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal in the time domain, comb teeth of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain ( comb) type, the frequency-domain start position information of the uplink reference signal, the number of the time slot (slot) where the uplink reference signal is located, or the time-domain start position information of the uplink reference signal.
  • the first configuration information may also include other information for configuring the uplink reference signal.
  • the positioning information is, for example, included in an information element (information element, IE) of the system information.
  • the positioning information is included in the existing IE in the system information, or an IE may be newly added in the system information to bear the positioning information.
  • the first type of system information may also include channel configuration information, and the channel configuration information may be used to configure an uplink channel.
  • the channel configuration information may be included in the positioning information, for example, the channel configuration information is included in the first configuration information, or the channel configuration information is included in the positioning information but not included in the first configuration information; Included in the positioning information, but included in the first type of system information, that is, the first type of system information also includes channel configuration information in addition to the positioning information.
  • the uplink channel includes, for example, an uplink control channel and/or an uplink shared channel. If the channel configuration information is not included in the positioning information, the channel configuration information and the positioning information may be included in one IE in the system information, or may be included in different IEs in the system information.
  • the first type of system information may include other information in addition to positioning information (or, in addition to positioning information and channel configuration information).
  • the first type of system information also includes cell selection information, and/or, includes unified access control (unifiied access control, UAC) information.
  • the cell selection information can be used to configure parameters for judging whether a certain cell is suitable for cell selection (for example, the cell selection information includes the minimum signal quality level required to access the cell), and the cell includes, for example, a system that transmits the first type The cell of the information;
  • the UAC information includes, for example, UAC barring information (uac-BarringInfo), which is used to restrict network access.
  • the system information is SIB1, or it may be other system information except SIB1 and MIB.
  • the positioning information is included in the existing common uplink bandwidth (BWP-UplinkCommon) of SIB1, or the positioning information can also be included in other existing IEs in SIB1, or it can also be included in SIB1 A new IE is added to carry location information.
  • BWP-UplinkCommon the existing common uplink bandwidth
  • the UE sends an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information.
  • the access network device indicates that the type of system information is the first type, the access network device receives the uplink reference signal from the UE.
  • the UE After the UE has obtained the positioning information through the first type of system information, the UE can send an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information, and the uplink reference signal can be used for positioning, for example, for positioning the UE.
  • the access network device After receiving the uplink reference signal, the access network device can measure the uplink reference signal and send the measurement result to the LMF, so that the LMF can locate the UE according to the measurement result. That is to say, the UE obtains the positioning information through the first type of system information, so that the UE can achieve positioning without performing random access, which reduces the communication procedures such as random access that the UE originally needs to perform before being positioned, and can simplify positioning process.
  • the system information including positioning information is of the first type.
  • the first type of system information is, for example, positioning-specific system information.
  • the first type of system information may not include public configuration information of cells included in traditional system information. and other content, but only includes positioning-related information (such as positioning information), which can reduce the capacity of the first type of system information, save transmission overhead, and also reduce the code complexity of the terminal device, thereby saving the storage of the terminal device Space, the final terminal equipment can achieve positioning with low power consumption, prolonging the service life of the terminal equipment.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart of the method.
  • the access network device sends a physical broadcast channel (physical broadcast channel, PBCH).
  • PBCH physical broadcast channel
  • the UE receives the PBCH from the access network device.
  • the access network equipment for example, transmits the PBCH in a certain cell, so there may be multiple UEs in the cell that can receive the PBCH, and the embodiments of the present application take the UE as an example.
  • the access network device is, for example, a serving base station of the UE.
  • the access network device sends the SSB, and the SSB is carried on the PBCH.
  • the PBCH can carry the MIB, and the MIB can include some public configuration information of the current cell, for example, the MIB can configure a system frame number (system frame number, SFN), and can also include PDCCH configuration information, etc.
  • the UE can obtain downlink time synchronization with the current cell by receiving the PBCH.
  • the access network device sends a downlink control channel.
  • the UE receives the downlink control channel from the access network device.
  • the downlink control channel is, for example, PDCCH.
  • the access network device sends downlink control information (DCI) through the PDCCH, and correspondingly, the UE receives the DCI from the access network device through the PDCCH.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • the MIB includes configuration information of the PDCCH.
  • the configuration information of the PDCCH includes, for example, time domain information and/or frequency domain information of the PDCCH.
  • the UE can detect the PDCCH according to the configuration information of the PDCCH.
  • the PDCCH can be used to schedule system information, and it can be understood that the PDCCH can schedule a PDSCH, and the PDSCH can carry system information.
  • the PDCCH carries DCI
  • the DCI can schedule the PDSCH
  • the PDSCH can carry system information.
  • the PDCCH may indicate the type of the scheduled system information, for example, indicate that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type, and all types except the first type belong to the second type.
  • the UE may not detect the PDCCH according to the MIB, but detects the PDCCH in other ways, so S401 is an optional step.
  • S402 may be the same step as S301 shown in FIG. 3 , so for more content about S402, refer to S301.
  • the access network device sends system information.
  • the type of system information indicated by the PDCCH is the first type, the UE detects the system information.
  • S403 may be the same step as S302 shown in FIG. 3 , so for more content about S403 , refer to S302 .
  • the UE sends the identifier of the UE to the access network device.
  • the access network device receives the identifier of the UE from the UE.
  • the UE does not perform random access. If the UE directly requests positioning or directly sends an uplink reference signal, the network may not be able to identify the identity of the UE. Therefore, the UE can send the identity of the UE to the access network device, so that the network can clarify the identity of the UE, so as to locate the UE.
  • the identifier of the UE is, for example, an identity number (ID) of the UE, and the UE ID is, for example, a serial number, which is used to uniquely identify the UE.
  • the UE ID can be configured when the UE leaves the factory and fixed inside the UE's chip, or it can also be a number assigned to the UE by other devices, such as the number assigned to the UE by access network equipment or core network equipment.
  • an identity of a UE is associated with the UE.
  • the UE can send the UE's identity to the access network device on the uplink channel configured by the first type of system information.
  • the uplink channel includes, for example, the uplink control channel and/or the uplink shared channel. The following example introduces the UE sending the UE through different uplink channels. way of identification.
  • the uplink channel includes an uplink control channel.
  • the uplink control channel can also be used to request positioning, that is to say, the uplink control channel can also be used to request positioning in addition to carrying the identity of the UE. Then, after receiving the uplink control channel, the access network device can make it clear that the UE wants to request positioning.
  • the uplink control channel is, for example, a physical uplink control channel (physical uplink control channel, PUCCH), or may also be another type of uplink control channel, and the embodiment of the present application uses PUCCH as an example.
  • SIB1 can be configured with a common PUCCH (pucch-ConfigCommon), and the common PUCCH can be used as the uplink control channel, and the UE can use the common PUCCH configured by SIB1 without being scheduled.
  • PUCCH sends information to access network equipment.
  • the UE may use the public PUCCH configured by SIB1 to send the identity of the UE to the access network device.
  • SIB1 can be configured with a PUCCH in a first format, such as PUCCH format 2, PUCCH format 3 or PUCCH format 4, or the first format can also be a newly defined PUCCH, For example, it is called PUCCH format 5, or it can have other names.
  • SIB1 can only configure PUCCH in the first format, without configuring traditional PUCCH format 0 or PUCCH format 1, or, in addition to configuring PUCCH in the first format, SIB1 can also configure traditional PUCCH format0 or PUCCH format 1, It's just that the UE in this embodiment of the application may not use traditional PUCCH format 0 or PUCCH format 1.
  • the UE sends the UE's identity to the access network device, it can send it through the PUCCH of the first format configured by SIB1.
  • the PUCCH of the first format can carry more information bits, so it can be used to carry the UE's identity.
  • the PUCCH in the first format can also implement a function, that is, the PUCCH in the first format can be used to request positioning, and the access network device According to the PUCCH in the first format, it is clear that there is a UE requesting positioning, and then according to the identity of the UE, the identity of the UE requesting positioning can be determined.
  • the uplink channel includes an uplink shared channel.
  • the UE may also send request information to the access network device, which is used to request positioning. After receiving the request information, the access network device can clearly confirm that there is a UE requesting positioning, and access The network device can then determine the identity of the UE requesting positioning according to the identity of the UE.
  • the UE may first send request information to the access network device, and then send the UE identifier to the access network device through the uplink shared channel; or, the UE may first send the UE identifier to the access network device through the uplink shared channel, Then send the request information to the access network device; or, the request information and the UE identifier can also be sent together, for example, both the request information and the UE identifier can be carried on the uplink shared channel and sent to the access network device together.
  • the uplink shared channel is, for example, a physical uplink shared channel (physical uplink share channel, PUSCH).
  • SIB1 can be configured with a common PUSCH, which can be used as the uplink shared channel.
  • the UE can use the public PUSCH configured by SIB1 to report to the access network.
  • the device sends data.
  • the UE may send the UE identifier to the access network device by using the public PUSCH configured by SIB1 without random access.
  • the request information is, for example, a preamble.
  • the UE may first send the preamble to the access network device, and the access network device may confirm that there is a UE requesting positioning after receiving the preamble. Then the UE sends the identity of the UE to the access network device through the public PUSCH, and the access network device can specify the identity of the UE requesting positioning.
  • SIB1 includes information A common configuration (msgA-ConfigCommon-r16) of version 16, and this IE can be configured with a common PUSCH and a preamble.
  • the msgA-ConfigCommon-r16 is configured with a preamble for positioning, so that The UE may send the preamble configured by msgA-ConfigCommon-r16 to the access network device, and may send the identity of the UE to the access network device on the common PUSCH configured by msgA-ConfigCommon-r16.
  • this optional solution uses a preamble, it only borrows the preamble to request positioning instead of performing a random access procedure. Therefore, although the UE sends the preamble to the access network device, the access network device receives the preamble It may not be necessary to send a response to the UE. In addition, the access network device does not need to send a response to the UE after receiving the identifier of the UE. Therefore, compared with the existing random access procedure, the solution of the embodiment of the present application reduces the signaling interaction process, which is beneficial to save the power consumption of the UE.
  • S404 is an optional step.
  • the UE sends an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information.
  • the access network device receives the uplink reference signal from the UE.
  • the UE obtains the corresponding information of the uplink reference signal through the positioning information, for example, obtains information such as the bandwidth of the uplink reference signal, and then the UE may send the uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the obtained information.
  • the uplink reference signal may be determined according to the identity of the UE, or in other words, the UE may determine the uplink reference signal according to the identity of the UE, or in other words, the identity of the UE may be used to determine the uplink reference signal.
  • UEs there may be multiple UEs requesting positioning, and all these UEs will send uplink reference signals to the access network device.
  • UEs send uplink reference signals in the form of sequences. Since these UEs do not perform random access, the access network equipment cannot send unicast messages to these UEs, that is, they cannot configure sequence identifiers of uplink reference signals for these UEs (for example, SRS sequence ID), then when these UEs send the sequence of the uplink reference signal to the access network equipment, it is likely that the sequence sent is the same, which will cause interference between UEs, and the access network equipment cannot identify all the uplink reference signal sequences. Which UE does the received uplink reference signal come from, so that the network cannot locate the UE.
  • an optional implementation manner in which the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identity of the UE is that the sequence identity of the uplink reference signal can be determined according to the identity of the UE, or in other words, the UE can determine the sequence of the uplink reference signal according to the identity of the UE logo.
  • the uplink reference signal is an SRS as an example.
  • SRS sequences are composed of ZC sequences. Different SRS sequences are mainly realized by configuring different sequence initialization IDs, that is, different sequence IDs correspond to different SRS sequences. Therefore, as long as the SRS sequence IDs are different, the corresponding SRS The sequence is different. Then, since the identities of different UEs are different, the sequence identities of the uplink reference signals determined by different UEs are different, and the sequences determined by different UEs are different, which can reduce the interference between UEs.
  • the UE also sends the UE identifier to the access network device, and the access network device can also determine the sequence identifier of the UE's uplink reference signal, so that the access network device can identify the relationship between the uplink reference signal and the UE,
  • the uplink reference signal can be detected correctly, and the UE can also be positioned correctly.
  • the identifier of the UE is the same as the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal.
  • the UE may directly use the UE identifier as the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal.
  • Table 1 which is an example in which the identifier of the UE is the same as the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal.
  • Table 1 the decimal system is taken as an example.
  • the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is a part of the identity of the UE, for example, the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is the high K bits of the UE identity, or the low K bits of the UE identity, or is the middle K bits of the identity of the UE, etc., and K is a positive integer.
  • the UE intercepts the identity of the UE to obtain the sequence identity of the uplink reference signal.
  • part to intercept that is, the value of K and the position of the K bit in the identity of the UE, it can be determined by
  • the configuration of the access network equipment is either pre-configured in the UE, or predefined through a protocol. For example, referring to Table 2, it is an example that the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is a part of the identifier of the UE. In Table 2, the decimal system is taken as an example.
  • Table 2 take the last bit of the UE ID as the sequence ID of the uplink reference signal as an example.
  • Table 3 is another example in which the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is a part of the identifier of the UE.
  • binary is taken as an example.
  • Table 3 take the lower 4 bits of the UE ID as the sequence ID of the uplink reference signal as an example.
  • the ID of the UE is "10100101”
  • the lower 4 bits of the ID are taken to be "0101”
  • "0101” can be used as the sequence ID of the uplink reference signal. If you convert "0101" to decimal, it will be "9".
  • the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is obtained by moduloing the identifier of the UE.
  • the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal may satisfy the following relationship:
  • X represents the identity of the UE, or represents a part of the identity of the UE (for example, a part intercepted from the identity of the UE according to the above method)
  • Y represents the first modulo coefficient
  • mod represents a modulo operation.
  • Y may be pre-configured in the UE, or configured by the access network device, or predefined by a protocol. For example, referring to Table 4, it is an example that the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is obtained modulo the identifier of the UE. In Table 4, decimal is taken as an example.
  • the UE may use any of the above methods to determine the sequence identity of the uplink reference signal.
  • the access network equipment because the identity of the UE is received, and the identity of the UE can be used to determine the uplink reference signal, the access network equipment can use the same method as The UE determines the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal in the same manner.
  • the method adopted by the UE and the access network device is, for example, pre-configured in the UE and the access network device, or is predefined by the protocol, or is configured by the access network device, so that the UE can send an uplink reference signal to the access network device, and then The network access device can also correctly detect the uplink reference signal from the UE.
  • the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identity of the UE.
  • the time domain position and/or the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal can be determined according to the identity of the UE, or in other words, the UE can also be determined according to The identity of the UE determines the time domain position and/or the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal.
  • the sequence identity of the uplink reference signal can be determined according to the identity of the UE, and/or the time domain position and/or frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal can be determined according to the identity of the UE.
  • the time domain position of the uplink reference signal includes the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located, and the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located can be determined according to the identity of the UE, or in other words, the UE can determine the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located according to the identity of the UE.
  • An optional determination method is that the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located is determined according to the identity of the UE and the number of time slots included in a subframe (subframe), or it can be understood as the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located It is determined according to the identifier of the UE, and the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located is the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located in a system frame (system frame). Wherein, the system frame may also be referred to as a radio frame (radio frame) or the like. For example, the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located satisfies the following relationship:
  • the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located X mod Z (Formula 4)
  • X represents the identity of the UE
  • Z represents a modulus coefficient
  • Z is, for example, the number of time slots included in one system frame.
  • X represents the identity of the UE
  • Z represents a modulus coefficient
  • Z is, for example, the number of time slots included in one system frame.
  • X represents the identity of the UE
  • Z represents a modulus coefficient
  • Z is, for example, the number of time slots included in one system frame.
  • Z represents the identity of the UE
  • Z represents a modulus coefficient
  • Z is, for example, the number of time slots included in one system frame.
  • FIG. 5 takes four UEs as an example. The identities of these four UEs are 1001, 1002, 1003 and 1004 respectively.
  • the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is determined by the UE identified as 1001 is 1, the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is determined by the UE identified as 1002 is 2, and the number of the time slot is 1003
  • the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is determined by the UE is 3, and the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is determined by the UE identified as 1004 is 4.
  • the time domain position of the uplink reference signal includes the time domain start position of the uplink reference signal
  • the time domain start position of the uplink reference signal can be determined according to the identity of the UE, or in other words, the UE can determine the uplink reference signal according to the identity of the UE The starting position of the time domain.
  • the start position of the time domain of the uplink reference signal may be determined according to the identity of the UE.
  • the start position of the time domain of the uplink reference signal may be determined according to the identity of the UE and configuration information of the uplink reference signal.
  • the time-domain start position of the uplink reference signal is, for example, the start symbol (symbol) of the uplink reference signal.
  • An optional determination method is that the number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identifier of the UE and the first information,
  • the first information includes the number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal and/or the number of symbols included in one time slot. Taking the first information including the number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal and the number of symbols included in a time slot as an example, for example, the number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal satisfies the following relationship:
  • the number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal X ⁇ M mod N (Formula 5)
  • X represents the identity of the UE
  • M represents the number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal
  • N is the number of symbols included in one time slot.
  • M is configured by, for example, the configuration information of the uplink reference signal.
  • Figure 6 takes three UEs as an example, the identifiers of these three UEs are 1001, 1002, and 1003 respectively, wherein the number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal determined by the UE with the identifier 1001 is 0, and the uplink reference signal occupies 4 symbols; the number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal determined by the UE identified as 1002 is 4, and the uplink reference signal occupies 4 symbols; the number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal determined by the UE identified as 1003 is 8, The uplink reference signal occupies 4 symbols.
  • the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal includes the frequency domain start position of the uplink reference signal
  • the frequency domain start position of the uplink reference signal can be determined according to the identity of the UE, or in other words, the UE can determine the uplink reference signal according to the identity of the UE The frequency domain starting position of .
  • the UE determines the frequency-domain start position of the uplink reference signal according to the UE identifier, which may specifically include that the UE determines the frequency-domain start position of the uplink reference signal according to the UE identifier and configuration information of the uplink reference signal.
  • An optional determination method is that the offset of the subcarrier (or the number of the subcarrier) where the frequency domain start position of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identity of the UE and the comb information of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain. For example, the offset of the subcarrier where the frequency domain starting position of the uplink reference signal is located satisfies the following relationship:
  • the number of the subcarrier where the frequency domain starting position of the uplink reference signal is located X mod Q (Formula 6)
  • X represents the identity of the UE
  • Q represents the comb information of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain
  • Q is configured through the configuration information of the uplink reference signal.
  • Q is configured through the configuration information of the uplink reference signal.
  • FIG. 7 takes three UEs as an example. The identifiers of these three UEs are 1001, 1002, and 1003 respectively.
  • the box with a horizontal line indicates the frequency domain position of the UE with the identifier of 1001
  • the box with "/" Indicates the frequency domain position where the UE identified as 1002 is located
  • the box drawn with " ⁇ " indicates the frequency domain position where the UE identified as 1003 is located.
  • the UE may not directly determine the time domain position and/or frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal according to the UE identity, but determine the time domain information and/or frequency domain information of the uplink reference signal, and then further determine the time domain information and/or frequency domain information according to the uplink reference signal
  • the time domain information determines the time domain position of the uplink reference signal, and determines the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal according to the frequency domain information of the uplink reference signal.
  • the time domain information of the uplink reference signal includes the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located, and/or includes the number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal; initial location information.
  • the UE can directly determine the time-domain position and/or frequency-domain position of the uplink reference signal according to the UE identity (or, according to the UE identity and the configuration information of the uplink reference signal), without first determining the position of the uplink reference signal.
  • the time domain information and/or frequency domain information further determine the resource location; or, the UE may first determine the time domain information and/or The frequency domain information further determines the resource location according to the time domain information and/or frequency domain information of the uplink reference signal.
  • the UE may not determine the time-domain position and/or the frequency-domain position of the uplink reference signal according to the identity of the UE, but determine the time-domain resource and/or the frequency-domain resource of the uplink reference signal. Determining the resource is equivalent to determining the location of the resource.
  • the access network device can determine the time domain position and frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal in the same way as the UE (Or, determine the time domain information and frequency domain information of the uplink reference signal in the same way as the UE, and further determine the resource location according to the time domain information and/or frequency domain information of the uplink reference signal; or, use the same method as the UE Determining time-domain resources and frequency-domain resources of the uplink reference signal).
  • the positioning information may not include the time domain information of the uplink reference signal; if the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal (or, frequency domain information, or, frequency domain resources) is determined according to the identity of the UE, and the positioning information may not include the frequency domain information of the uplink reference signal.
  • the positioning information may not include the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located; or, the positioning information includes the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located, then the UE and the access The network device no longer determines the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located according to the identity of the UE.
  • the positioning information may not include the time domain start position information of the uplink reference signal; or, the positioning information includes the time domain start position information of the uplink reference signal, then the UE and the access network device no longer determine the start symbol of the uplink reference signal according to the identity of the UE.
  • the positioning information may not include the starting position information in the frequency domain of the uplink reference signal; or, the positioning information includes information about the starting position in the frequency domain of the uplink reference signal, Then the UE and the access network device no longer determine the frequency-domain starting position of the uplink reference signal according to the identity of the UE.
  • S405 may be the same step as S303 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the access network device sends a first positioning request to the AMF.
  • the AMF receives the first positioning request from the access network device.
  • the first positioning request may request to locate the UE, for example, the first positioning request includes the identifier of the UE.
  • the AMF may authenticate the UE. For example, if the UE has registered with the core network, the AMF can determine the registration information of the UE according to the identity of the UE, so as to authenticate the UE according to the registration information of the UE to determine whether the UE is legal. And if the UE is not registered with the core network (for example, as will be introduced later, the protocol stack of the UE may have been tailored without retaining the non-access stratum (NAS), the UE may not be able to register with the core network.
  • NAS non-access stratum
  • the information of one or more UEs allowed to be located may be pre-stored in the AMF, for example, the identities of these UEs are pre-stored, and the AMF can determine whether the UE identities have been pre-stored, and if the UE identities have been pre-stored , it is determined that the UE is legal, otherwise it is determined that the UE is not legal.
  • the AMF may send a location rejection message to the access network device, thereby ending the location procedure.
  • the AMF sends a second positioning request to the LMF.
  • the LMF receives the second positioning request from the AMF.
  • the second positioning request includes the identifier of the UE.
  • the UE ID included in the second positioning request in S407 may be the same as or different from the UE ID in the preceding steps.
  • the identity of the UE involved in S401-S406 is called the first identity
  • the identity of the UE sent by the AMF to the LMF in S407 is called the second identity. Both the first identity and the second identity are the identity of the UE, but they may be the same or different.
  • the AMF can directly send the first identifier to the LMF, then the first identifier is the same as the second identifier; or, the AMF can also process the first identifier to obtain the second identifier, and then send the second identifier to the LMF, then The first identification is different from the second identification.
  • one processing method of the AMF for the first identification is that the AMF determines the sequence identification of the uplink reference signal according to the first identification (refer to the above for the determination method), then the sequence identification of the uplink reference signal can be used as the second identification; another example, another One processing method is that the AMF determines the number of the symbol where the time domain start position of the uplink reference signal is located according to the first identifier (refer to the above for the determination method), then the number of the symbol where the time domain start position of the uplink reference signal is located can be As the second identifier; for another example, the AMF determines the number of the subcarrier where the frequency domain start position of the uplink reference signal is located according to the first identifier (refer to the above for the determination method), then the subcarrier where the frequency domain start position of the uplink reference signal is located The serial number of the carrier can be used as the second identifier. In the above several manners, although the second identity is actually used to identify the uplink reference signal, since the uplink reference signal
  • the LMF sends a first request message to the access network device.
  • the access network device receives the first request message from the LMF.
  • the first request message is used to request to obtain information for configuring the uplink reference signal.
  • the access network device sends a location response message to the LMF.
  • the LMF receives a location response message from the access network device.
  • the first response message may include information for configuring the uplink reference signal, for example, the first response message includes positioning information or first configuration information.
  • the LMF sends measurement requests to multiple access network devices.
  • multiple access network devices receive measurement requests from the LMF.
  • multiple access network devices include the access network device, and S410 takes the access network device receiving a measurement request from the LMF as an example.
  • Which access network devices are included in the multiple access network devices can be determined by the LMF, for example, the LMF can select multiple access network devices with better channel quality, or select multiple access network devices with lighter loads, etc.
  • the measurement request may include positioning information, or include first configuration information.
  • the measurement request may further include a third identifier, for example, the third identifier is obtained by the LMF according to the second identifier.
  • the third identifier is the same as the second identifier, or the third identifier is different from the second identifier.
  • the AMF directly sends the first identifier to the LMF, then the first identifier is the second identifier, or the first identifier is the same as the second identifier.
  • the LMF may directly send the second identifier to multiple access network devices, then the second identifier is the third identifier, or the second identifier is the same as the third identifier; or, the LMF may also send the second identifier (the second identifier and the third identifier The first identifier is the same or different) to obtain the third identifier, and then send the third identifier to the access network device, then the second identifier is different from the third identifier.
  • the LMF processes the second identifier reference may be made to the manner in which the AMF processes the first identifier introduced in S407.
  • the reason why the measurement request includes the third identifier is to enable multiple access network devices to determine the uplink reference signal sent by the UE according to the third identifier, so as to be able to detect the uplink reference signal from the UE.
  • the process for the access network device to determine the uplink reference signal according to the third identifier reference may be made to the above process for the UE to determine the uplink reference signal according to the UE identifier (first identifier).
  • the access network device sends the measurement result to the LMF.
  • the LMF receives the measurement result from the access network device.
  • each access network device among the plurality of access network devices After each access network device among the plurality of access network devices receives the uplink reference signal from the UE, it can measure the uplink reference signal to obtain a measurement result.
  • the measurement result obtained by the access network device includes, for example, information such as relative time of arrival (relative time of arrival, RTOA) and/or angle of arrival (angle of arrival, AOA).
  • RTOA relative time of arrival
  • AOA angle of arrival
  • Multiple access network devices can send the obtained measurement results to the LMF.
  • FIG. 4 takes the UE's serving base station (that is, the access network device) sending the measurement results to the LMF as an example.
  • the LMF determines the location of the UE according to the measurement result.
  • the LMF has received multiple measurement results from multiple access network devices, and the LMF can determine the location of the UE according to the multiple measurement results.
  • the LMF determines the location of the UE, reference may be made to the introduction of S116 in the process shown in FIG. 1A .
  • S406-S412 are optional steps.
  • the network may also use other methods to locate the UE.
  • the UE described in the embodiment of the present application is, for example, a UE dedicated to positioning, or in other words, the UE is only used for positioning. That is, the UE may only need to implement positioning-related functions, and does not need to implement other functions, thereby enabling the UE to implement positioning with lower power consumption.
  • the functions that can be implemented by the UE in the embodiment of the present application include one or more of the following: cell search (for example, including receiving broadcast channels and/or receiving downlink control channels, etc.), sending positioning reference signals (for example, as described in the embodiments of the present application) uplink reference signal), send an uplink control channel, or send an uplink shared channel.
  • the UE may not have a NAS layer, and may not have functions such as sending an RRC establishment request.
  • the current protocol stack of the UE can be tailored.
  • communication-related functions can be deleted on the UE side, and only positioning-related functions can be reserved.
  • the tailored UE is a positioning-specific UE in this embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 8 which is a schematic diagram of the protocol stack before pruning.
  • both UE and AMF include the NAS layer.
  • both the UE and the base station include the RRC layer, packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer, radio link control (radio link control, RLC) layer, media Access control (media access control, MAC) layer and physical (PHY) layer.
  • FIG. 9 again, which is a schematic diagram of the protocol stack after pruning.
  • the NAS layer is represented by a dotted line, indicating that the NAS layer has been cut off.
  • the boxes used to represent these layers in FIG. 9 are narrower than those in FIG. Indicates that some or all functions related to communication in these layers are cut off, and functions related to positioning are retained.
  • the base station side still includes the RRC layer, PDCP layer, RLC layer, MAC layer, and PHY layer, that is, the protocol stack on the base station side may not be tailored, but these protocol stacks of the base station are used to serve the services shown in Figure 9.
  • the functions of the UE may be reduced, and the hatched part indicates that the protocol stack on the base station side serves the functions of the UE.
  • the UE described in this embodiment of the present application may also be an ordinary UE, not a UE dedicated to positioning, for example, there is no need to tailor the protocol stack of the UE. That is to say, the solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various types of UEs.
  • the positioning information used to configure the uplink reference signal may be included in the system information, the UE can obtain the positioning information by receiving the system information, and the UE can send the uplink reference signal to the access network device after obtaining the positioning information , without completing random access, or in other words, the UE can send an uplink reference signal to the access network device without performing random access, so that the network can locate the UE.
  • the communication procedures such as random access that the UE originally needs to perform before being positioned are reduced, and the positioning process can be simplified.
  • the system information including positioning information is the first type.
  • the first type of system information may not include the public configuration information of the cell included in the traditional system information, but only includes positioning-related information (such as positioning information ), which can reduce the capacity of the first type of system information, save transmission overhead, and also reduce the code complexity of the UE, thereby saving the storage space of the UE.
  • the UE can achieve positioning with lower power consumption, extending the UE lifetime.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a third communication method, through which the steps in the positioning process can be further saved, and the power consumption of the UE can be saved.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the method.
  • the access network device sends a downlink broadcast channel.
  • the UE receives the downlink broadcast channel from the access network device.
  • the downlink broadcast channel may include configuration information of the downlink control channel.
  • the downlink broadcast channel is a physical broadcast channel (physical broadcast channel, PBCH), and the access network equipment, for example, transmits the PBCH in a certain cell, so there may be multiple UEs in the cell that can receive the PBCH.
  • PBCH physical broadcast channel
  • the access network device is, for example, a serving base station of the UE.
  • what the access network device sends is the SSB, and the SSB includes the PBCH.
  • the PBCH can carry the MIB, and the MIB can include some public configuration information of the current cell, for example, the MIB can configure a system frame number (system frame number, SFN), and can also include configuration information of a downlink control channel, such as a PDCCH.
  • the UE can obtain downlink time synchronization with the current cell by receiving the PBCH.
  • the access network device sends a downlink control channel.
  • the UE receives the downlink control channel from the access network device.
  • the downlink control channel is, for example, PDCCH.
  • the MIB includes configuration information of the PDCCH.
  • the configuration information of the PDCCH includes, for example, time domain information and/or frequency domain information of the PDCCH.
  • the UE can detect the PDCCH according to the configuration information of the PDCCH.
  • the PDCCH can schedule the PDSCH, or in other words, the DCI carried by the PDCCH can schedule the PDSCH.
  • the PDCCH may also carry positioning information, for example, the positioning information may be included in the DCI, for example, the positioning information may be carried through a reserved space in the DCI.
  • the positioning information may include information for configuring an uplink reference signal, and the information for configuring an uplink reference signal is called first configuration information, for example.
  • the positioning information only includes the first configuration information, and at this time the positioning information and the first configuration information may be the same concept; or, the positioning information includes other information for realizing the positioning function in addition to the first configuration information.
  • the positioning information is carried by the PDCCH, and the UE can obtain the positioning information without receiving system information.
  • the uplink reference signal can be sent to the access network device according to the positioning information, so as to perform the positioning process, further reducing the need to perform in the positioning process steps, saving signaling overhead and reducing UE power consumption.
  • the PDCCH may also carry scheduling information, and the scheduling information may be used to schedule (or configure) uplink channels.
  • the scheduling information may be included in the positioning information, for example, the scheduling information is included in the first configuration information, or the scheduling information is included in the positioning information but not included in the first configuration information; for another example, the scheduling information is not included in the positioning information , but included in the DCI, that is, the DCI also includes scheduling information in addition to positioning information.
  • the uplink channel includes, for example, an uplink control channel and/or an uplink shared channel.
  • the PDCCH in the embodiment of the present application may carry positioning information, and this type of PDCCH may be regarded as a first-type PDCCH, for example, the first-type PDCCH is a positioning-specific PDCCH.
  • the access network device may also send the second type of PDCCH, for example, the second type of PDCCH is a common PDCCH, and the second type of PDCCH may not carry positioning information. Therefore, for the UE, the type of the PDCCH can be identified, so as to receive the required PDCCH. To enable the UE to identify the PDCCH, the access network device can make a corresponding instruction.
  • the indication can be performed through the PBCH.
  • the PBCH may indicate that the type of the PDCCH is the first type or the second type.
  • the type of PDCCH is indicated by a reserved bit in the MIB. If the value of this bit is "0", it indicates that the type of PDCCH is the second type; if the value of this bit is "1", it indicates the type of PDCCH for the first type.
  • the UE can determine the type of PDCCH to be sent by the access network device according to the indication of the MIB.
  • the UE For the UE in the embodiment of this application (for example, the UE that needs to be positioned, or has high requirements for delay and/or power consumption For UEs, or UEs with low communication requirements, etc.), if the MIB indicates that the PDCCH type is the first type, the UE can detect the PDCCH, and if the MIB indicates that the PDCCH type is the second type, the UE does not need to detect the PDCCH , thereby saving the power consumption of the UE.
  • the MIB indicates that the PDCCH type is the second Type 2
  • the UE can detect the PDCCH, and if the MIB indicates that the type of the PDCCH is the first type, the UE does not need to detect the PDCCH, thereby saving the power consumption of these UEs.
  • the indication may be performed through the PDCCH.
  • the scrambling sequence of the PDCCH (or DCI) is the first sequence, it indicates that the type of the PDCCH is the first type, or indicates that the PDCCH carries positioning information; if the scrambling sequence of the PDCCH (or DCI) If it is the second sequence, it indicates that the type of the PDCCH is the second type, or indicates that the PDCCH does not carry positioning information.
  • the first sequence is, for example, a newly defined scrambling sequence, for example called positioning (POS)-SI-RNTI
  • the second sequence is, for example, SI-RNTI.
  • the UE can determine whether the PDCCH is the PDCCH required by the UE according to the scrambling sequence used to scramble the PDCCH (or DCI). For example, for a UE in this embodiment of the present application (such as a UE that needs positioning, or a UE that requires high delay and/or power consumption, or a UE that does not require high communication, etc.), if the scrambling sequence of the PDCCH If it is the first sequence, the UE can further process the PDCCH (or DCI), such as decoding and other processing, and if the scrambling sequence of the PDCCH is the second sequence, the UE does not need to perform further processing on the PDCCH, for example, the UE can The PDCCH is discarded, thereby reducing the processing steps of the UE and saving the power consumption of the UE.
  • the scrambling sequence of the PDCCH or DCI
  • the scrambling sequence of the PDCCH is the first If the scrambling sequence of the PDCCH is the second sequence, the UE does not need to perform further processing on the PDCCH, for example, the UE can discard the PDCCH, thereby reducing the processing steps of the UE and saving the power consumption of the UE.
  • the access network device may also indicate whether the PDCCH carries positioning information in other ways, and the UE may also identify the PDCCH in other ways accordingly, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the UE sends an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information.
  • the access network device may also receive the uplink reference signal from the UE according to the positioning information.
  • the UE After the UE has obtained the positioning information through the PDCCH, the UE can send an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information, and the uplink reference signal can be used for positioning, for example, for positioning the UE.
  • the access network device After receiving the uplink reference signal, the access network device can measure the uplink reference signal and send the measurement result to the LMF, so that the LMF can locate the UE according to the measurement result. That is to say, the UE obtains positioning information through the PDCCH, so that the UE not only does not need to perform random access, but also can achieve positioning without receiving system information such as SIB, which reduces the need for the UE to receive system information such as SIB before being positioned. And random access and other communication processes can simplify the positioning process.
  • the communication process that the terminal device needs to execute is reduced, there is no need to insert random access-related codes inside the terminal device, thereby reducing the storage space of the terminal device, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • there is a high demand for positioning power consumption for example, the service life of 6 to 18 months needs to be maintained, and these scenarios require far more communication. Far less than the need for positioning. Therefore, if the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application are applied to these scenarios, since the UE does not need to perform communication procedures such as random access, it can help maintain a longer service life.
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the method.
  • the access network device sends the PBCH.
  • the UE receives the PBCH from the access network device.
  • S1101 may be the same step as S1001 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 , and for more details, refer to the introduction of S1001 .
  • the access network device sends a downlink control channel.
  • the UE receives the downlink control channel from the access network device.
  • the downlink control channel is, for example, PDCCH.
  • S1102 may be the same step as S1002 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 , and for more details, refer to the introduction of S1002.
  • the UE sends the identifier of the UE to the access network device.
  • the access network device receives the identifier of the UE from the UE.
  • the UE does not perform random access. If the UE directly requests positioning or directly sends an uplink reference signal, the network may not be able to identify the identity of the UE. Therefore, the UE can send the identity of the UE to the access network device, so that the network can clarify the identity of the UE, so as to locate the UE.
  • the identifier of the UE is, for example, an identity number (ID) of the UE, and the UE ID is, for example, a serial number, which is used to uniquely identify the UE.
  • the UE ID can be configured when the UE leaves the factory and fixed inside the UE's chip, or it can also be a number assigned to the UE by other devices, such as the number assigned to the UE by access network equipment or core network equipment.
  • an identity of a UE is associated with the UE.
  • the PDCCH carries scheduling information, and the UE may send the identifier of the UE to the access network device on the uplink channel scheduled (or configured) by the scheduling information.
  • the uplink channel includes, for example, an uplink control channel and/or an uplink shared channel.
  • S404 For content such as the manner in which the UE sends the UE's identity to the access network device through the uplink channel, reference may be made to S404 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 .
  • S1103 is an optional step.
  • the UE sends an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information.
  • the access network device may also receive the uplink reference signal from the UE according to the positioning information.
  • the UE obtains the corresponding information of the uplink reference signal through the positioning information, for example, obtains information such as the bandwidth of the uplink reference signal, and then the UE may send the uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the obtained information.
  • the uplink reference signal may be determined according to the identity of the UE, or in other words, the UE may determine the uplink reference signal according to the identity of the UE, or in other words, the identity of the UE may be used to determine the uplink reference signal.
  • the sequence identity of the uplink reference signal may be determined according to the identity of the UE, and/or the time domain position and/or frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal may be determined according to the identity of the UE, For content and so on, refer to S405 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 .
  • S1104 may be the same step as S1003 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 .
  • the access network device sends a first positioning request to the AMF.
  • the AMF receives the first positioning request from the access network device.
  • the first positioning request may request to locate the UE, for example, the first positioning request includes the identifier of the UE.
  • the AMF sends a second positioning request to the LMF.
  • the LMF receives the second positioning request from the AMF.
  • the second positioning request includes the identifier of the UE.
  • the identifier of the UE included in the second positioning request in S1106 may be the same as or different from the identifier of the UE in the preceding steps.
  • the UE identity involved in S1101-S1105 is called the first identity
  • the UE identity sent by the AMF to the LMF in S1106 is called the second identity.
  • S407 For this part of the content and more content of S1106, refer to S407 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 .
  • the LMF sends a first request message to the access network device.
  • the access network device receives the first request message from the LMF.
  • the first request message is used to request to obtain information for configuring the uplink reference signal.
  • the access network device sends a location response message to the LMF.
  • the LMF receives a location response message from the access network device.
  • the first response message may include information for configuring the uplink reference signal, for example, the first response message includes positioning information or first configuration information.
  • the LMF sends measurement requests to multiple access network devices.
  • multiple access network devices receive measurement requests from the LMF.
  • multiple access network devices include the access network device, and S1109 takes the access network device receiving a measurement request from the LMF as an example.
  • S1109 For more details about S1109, refer to S410 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 .
  • the access network device sends the measurement result to the LMF.
  • the LMF receives the measurement result from the access network device.
  • S1110 For more details about S1110, refer to S411 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 .
  • the LMF determines the location of the UE according to the measurement result.
  • the LMF has received multiple measurement results from multiple access network devices, and the LMF can determine the location of the UE according to the multiple measurement results.
  • the LMF determines the location of the UE, reference may be made to the introduction of S116 in the process shown in FIG. 1A .
  • S1105-S1111 are all optional steps.
  • the network may also use other methods to locate the UE.
  • the UE obtains the positioning information through the PDCCH, so that the UE not only does not need to perform random access, but also can realize positioning without receiving system information such as SIB, which reduces the need for the UE to perform before being positioned.
  • Communication processes such as system information and random access can simplify the positioning process.
  • the communication process that the terminal device needs to execute is reduced, there is no need to insert random access-related codes inside the terminal device, thereby reducing the storage space of the terminal device, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the UE sends the UE identity to the access network equipment on the uplink control channel, since the UE does not need to send or receive the control channel, it only needs to support the control channel.
  • Channel coding such as polar code (polar)
  • shared channel coding such as low density parity check code (low density parity check Code, LDPC)
  • LDPC low density parity check Code
  • FIG. 12 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1200 may be the terminal device or the circuit system of the terminal device described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 , the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 , the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 11 , for implementing the method corresponding to the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the communication device 1200 may be the access network device or the access network device described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 , the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 , the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the circuit system of the network access device is used to implement the method corresponding to the access network device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • a circuit system is a chip system.
  • the communication device 1200 includes at least one processor 1201 .
  • the processor 1201 can be used for internal processing of the device to realize certain control processing functions.
  • processor 1201 includes instructions.
  • processor 1201 may store data.
  • different processors may be separate devices, may be located in different physical locations, and may be located on different integrated circuits.
  • different processors may be integrated within one or more processors, eg, on one or more integrated circuits.
  • the communication device 1200 includes one or more memories 1203 for storing instructions.
  • data may also be stored in the memory 1203 .
  • the processor and memory can be set separately or integrated together.
  • the communication device 1200 includes a communication line 1202 and at least one communication interface 1204 .
  • the memory 1203, the communication line 1202 and the communication interface 1204 are all optional, they are all indicated by dotted lines in FIG. 12 .
  • the communication device 1200 may further include a transceiver and/or an antenna.
  • a transceiver may be used to send information to or receive information from other devices.
  • the transceiver may be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, an input-output interface, etc., and is used to realize the transceiver function of the communication device 1200 through an antenna.
  • the transceiver includes a transmitter (transmitter) and a receiver (receiver).
  • the transmitter can be used to generate a radio frequency (radio frequency) signal from a baseband signal
  • the receiver can be used to convert the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal.
  • the processor 1201 may include a general-purpose central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), a microprocessor, a specific application integrated circuit (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), or one or more integrated circuits for controlling the program execution of the application program. circuit.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • Communication line 1202 may include a pathway for communicating information between the above-described components.
  • Communication interface 1204 using any device such as a transceiver for communicating with other devices or communication networks, such as Ethernet, radio access network (radio access network, RAN), wireless local area networks (wireless local area networks, WLAN), Wired access network, etc.
  • a transceiver for communicating with other devices or communication networks, such as Ethernet, radio access network (radio access network, RAN), wireless local area networks (wireless local area networks, WLAN), Wired access network, etc.
  • the memory 1203 may be a read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (random access memory, RAM) or other types that can store information and instructions It can also be an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM) or other optical disc storage, optical disc storage (including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and can be programmed by a computer Any other medium accessed, but not limited to.
  • the memory 1203 may exist independently, and is connected to the processor 1201 through the communication line 1202 . Alternatively, the memory 1203 may also be integrated with the processor 1201 .
  • the memory 1203 is used to store computer-executed instructions for implementing the solution of the present application, and the execution is controlled by the processor 1201 .
  • the processor 1201 is configured to execute computer-executed instructions stored in the memory 1203, so as to implement the communication methods provided in the above-mentioned embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer-executed instructions in the embodiments of the present application may also be referred to as application program codes, which is not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the processor 1201 may include one or more CPUs, for example, CPU0 and CPU1 in FIG. 12 .
  • the communication device 1200 may include multiple processors, for example, the processor 1201 and the processor 1208 in FIG. 12 .
  • Each of these processors may be a single-core (single-CPU) processor or a multi-core (multi-CPU) processor.
  • a processor herein may refer to one or more devices, circuits, and/or processing cores for processing data (eg, computer program instructions).
  • the chip When the apparatus shown in FIG. 12 is a chip, such as a chip of an access network device, or a chip of a UPF, or a chip of an SMF, or a chip of a terminal device, the chip includes a processor 1201 (may also include a processor 1208 ), communication line 1202, memory 1203 and communication interface 1204.
  • the communication interface 1204 may be an input interface, a pin, or a circuit.
  • the memory 1203 may be a register, a cache, and the like.
  • the processor 1201 and the processor 1208 may be a general-purpose CPU, a microprocessor, an ASIC, or one or more integrated circuits for controlling program execution of the communication method of any of the above-mentioned embodiments.
  • the communication apparatus 1200 may be used to implement the method corresponding to the terminal device in the above embodiment of the application, and for specific functions, refer to the description in the above embodiment.
  • the communication apparatus 1200 includes a processor 1201, and the processor 1201 is configured to execute a computer program or an instruction, so that the method corresponding to the terminal device in the above application embodiment is executed.
  • the method corresponding to the terminal device in the above-mentioned application embodiment includes: receiving a downlink control channel from the access network device, the downlink control channel is used to schedule system information, and the downlink control channel also indicates the information of the system information
  • the type is the first type or the second type, the system information of the first type includes positioning information, the system information of the second type does not include the positioning information, and the positioning information includes information for configuring uplink reference signals ; if the downlink control channel indicates that the type of the system information is the first type, detecting the system information; sending an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information.
  • the method corresponding to the terminal device in the above-mentioned application embodiment includes: receiving a downlink broadcast channel, the downlink broadcast channel including configuration information of a downlink control channel; receiving the downlink control channel, the downlink control channel carrying positioning information , the positioning information includes information for configuring an uplink reference signal; and sending an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information.
  • the communication apparatus 1200 may be used to implement the method corresponding to the access network device in the above-mentioned application embodiment, and for specific functions, refer to the description in the above-mentioned embodiment.
  • the communication apparatus 1200 includes a processor 1201, and the processor 1201 is configured to execute a computer program or an instruction, so that the method corresponding to the access network device in the above application embodiment is executed.
  • the method corresponding to the access network device in the above-mentioned application embodiment includes: sending a downlink control channel, the downlink control channel is used to schedule system information, and the downlink control channel also indicates that the type of the system information is the first One type or the second type, the system information of the first type includes positioning information, the system information of the second type does not include the positioning information, and the positioning information includes information for configuring uplink reference signals; sending the The system information; if the type of the system information is the first type, receive an uplink reference signal from the terminal device.
  • the method corresponding to the access network device in the above-mentioned application embodiment includes: sending a downlink broadcast channel, where the downlink broadcast channel includes configuration information of a downlink control channel; sending the downlink control channel, where the downlink control channel carries Positioning information, where the positioning information includes information for configuring an uplink reference signal; according to the positioning information, an uplink reference signal is received from a terminal device.
  • the embodiment of the present application may divide the device into functional modules according to the above method example, for example, each functional module may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module.
  • the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software function modules.
  • FIG. 13 shows a schematic diagram of an apparatus.
  • the apparatus 1300 may be the access network device or terminal device involved in the above method embodiments, or an access network device A chip in a network access device or a chip in a terminal device.
  • the apparatus 1300 includes a sending unit 1301 , a processing unit 1302 and a receiving unit 1303 .
  • apparatus 1300 may be used to implement the steps performed by the access network device or the terminal device in the method of the embodiment of the present application, and related features may refer to the above embodiments, and details are not repeated here.
  • the functions/implementation process of the sending unit 1301, the receiving unit 1303, and the processing unit 1302 in FIG. 13 may be implemented by the processor 1201 in FIG. 12 invoking computer-executed instructions stored in the memory 1203.
  • the function/implementation process of the processing unit 1302 in FIG. 13 can be realized by calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 1203 by the processor 1201 in FIG. The process may be implemented through communication interface 1204 in FIG. 12 .
  • the functions/implementation process of the sending unit 1301 and the receiving unit 1303 may also be implemented through pins or circuits.
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable storage medium stores computer programs or instructions, and when the computer programs or instructions are executed, the above method embodiments performed by the access network device or the terminal device can be implemented. method of execution.
  • the functions described in the above embodiments can be realized in the form of software function units and sold or used as independent products.
  • the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product in essence or the part that contributes to it or the part of the technical solution.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including several instructions for So that a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) executes all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, ROM, RAM, magnetic disk or optical disk and other various media that can store program codes.
  • the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product including: computer program code, when the computer program code is run on the computer, the computer is made to execute any of the preceding method embodiments by the terminal device or the access network device The method executed.
  • the present application also provides a system, which includes a terminal device and an access network device, or, includes a terminal device, an access network device and a positioning server.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a processing apparatus, including a processor and an interface; the processor is configured to execute the method performed by the terminal device or the access network device involved in any one of the above method embodiments.
  • all or part of them may be implemented by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application will be generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wired (eg, coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the available medium may be a magnetic medium (such as a floppy disk, a hard disk, or a magnetic tape), an optical medium (such as a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (such as a solid state disk (solid state disk, SSD)), etc.
  • the various illustrative logic units and circuits described in the embodiments of the present application can be programmed through general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processors, DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (application specific integrated circuits, ASICs), field programmable A field-programmable gate array (FPGA), or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any combination thereof designed to implement or operate the described functions.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor, and optionally, the general-purpose processor may also be any conventional processor, controller, microcontroller or state machine.
  • a processor may also be implemented by a combination of computing devices, such as a digital signal processor and a microprocessor, multiple microprocessors, one or more microprocessors combined with a digital signal processor core, or any other similar configuration to accomplish.
  • the steps of the method or algorithm described in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embedded in hardware, a software unit executed by a processor, or a combination of both.
  • the software unit may be stored in RAM, flash memory, ROM, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), EEPROM, registers, hard disk, removable disk, CD-ROM or any other form in the art in the storage medium.
  • the storage medium can be connected to the processor, so that the processor can read information from the storage medium, and can write information to the storage medium.
  • the storage medium can also be integrated into the processor.
  • the processor and the storage medium can be set in the ASIC, and the ASIC can be set in the terminal device.
  • the processor and the storage medium may also be disposed in different components in the terminal device.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present application relates to a communication method and apparatus. A terminal device receives a downlink control channel from an access network device, the downlink control channel indicating that the type of system information is a first type or a second type; the first type of system information comprises positioning information, and the second type of system information does not comprise positioning information, the positioning information comprising information used for configuring an uplink reference signal. If the downlink control channel indicates that the type of the system information is the first type, the terminal device detects the system information. The terminal device sends an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information. By means of the solution provided in embodiments of the present application, the communication processes such as random access that the terminal device originally needs to perform before being positioned are reduced, and the process of positioning can be simplified. Moreover, because the communication processes that the terminal device needs to perform are reduced, no random access-related code needs to be placed inside the terminal device, such that the storage space of the terminal device can be reduced, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal device.

Description

一种通信方法及装置A communication method and device
相关申请的交叉引用Cross References to Related Applications
本申请要求在2021年11月17日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202111359800.9、申请名称为“一种通信方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to a Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office of China on November 17, 2021, with application number 202111359800.9, and application title "A Communication Method and Device", the entire contents of which are incorporated by reference in this application middle.
技术领域technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法及装置。The present application relates to the technical field of communication, and in particular to a communication method and device.
背景技术Background technique
在最新的第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)标准中,支持多种定位技术,其中包括基于上行链路的到达时间差(uplink-time difference of arrival,UL-TDOA)定位技术。In the latest 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) standard, multiple positioning technologies are supported, including uplink-time difference of arrival (UL-TDOA) positioning technology based on the uplink.
对于UL-TDOA定位技术,需要基站对上行链路的参考信号进行测量,例如测量从用户设备(user equipment,UE)接收的探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)的到达时间,定位管理功能(location management function,LMF)再根据基站的测量结果对UE进行定位。UL-TDOA技术下的定位过程一般经过以下几个步骤:首先由LMF向待定位UE的服务基站请求SRS配置信息,服务基站将SRS配置信息反馈给LMF,并将SRS配置信息发送给该UE;然后LMF向其他基站指示SRS配置信息;LMF向获得了SRS配置信息的各个基站请求测量,这些基站在接收到LMF的指示后开始从UE接收SRS,并测量SRS的到达时间;最后,这些基站将测量结果上报给LMF,LMF利用接收的测量结果估算该UE的位置。For the UL-TDOA positioning technology, the base station needs to measure the reference signal of the uplink, such as measuring the arrival time of the sounding reference signal (SRS) received from the user equipment (user equipment, UE), and the positioning management function ( location management function, LMF) and then locate the UE according to the measurement results of the base station. The positioning process under UL-TDOA technology generally goes through the following steps: first, the LMF requests SRS configuration information from the serving base station of the UE to be located, and the serving base station feeds back the SRS configuration information to the LMF, and sends the SRS configuration information to the UE; Then the LMF indicates the SRS configuration information to other base stations; the LMF requests measurement from each base station that has obtained the SRS configuration information, and these base stations start to receive the SRS from the UE after receiving the instruction from the LMF, and measure the arrival time of the SRS; finally, these base stations will The measurement results are reported to the LMF, and the LMF uses the received measurement results to estimate the location of the UE.
目前的定位UE既要支持3GPP的通信功能又要支持定位功能,且UE需要在与基站建立无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)连接后才能被定位。可见,目前的定位过程不利于节省UE的功耗。The current positioning UE needs to support both the 3GPP communication function and the positioning function, and the UE needs to establish a radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) connection with the base station before it can be positioned. It can be seen that the current positioning process is not conducive to saving the power consumption of the UE.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法及装置,用于节省终端设备的功耗。Embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and device, which are used to save power consumption of terminal equipment.
第一方面,提供第一种通信方法,该方法可由终端设备执行,或由包括终端设备功能的其他设备执行,或由芯片系统或其他功能模块执行,该芯片系统或功能模块能够实现终端设备的功能,该芯片系统或功能模块例如设置在终端设备中。该方法包括:从接入网设备接收下行控制信道,所述下行控制信道用于调度系统信息,且所述下行控制信道还指示所述系统信息的类型为第一类型或第二类型,所述第一类型的系统信息包括定位信息,所述第二类型的系统信息不包括所述定位信息,所述定位信息包括用于配置上行参考信号的信息;如果所述下行控制信道指示所述系统信息的类型为所述第一类型,检测所述系统信息;根据所述定位信息,向所述接入网设备发送上行参考信号。In the first aspect, a first communication method is provided, which can be executed by a terminal device, or by other devices including the functions of the terminal device, or by a chip system or other functional modules, and the chip system or functional modules can realize the functions of the terminal device function, the chip system or functional module is, for example, set in a terminal device. The method includes: receiving a downlink control channel from an access network device, the downlink control channel is used to schedule system information, and the downlink control channel also indicates that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type, the The first type of system information includes positioning information, the second type of system information does not include the positioning information, and the positioning information includes information for configuring uplink reference signals; if the downlink control channel indicates the system information The type is the first type, detecting the system information; sending an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information.
本申请实施例中,用于配置上行参考信号的定位信息可以包括在系统信息中,终端设 备通过接收系统信息就能获得定位信息,而终端设备获得定位信息后就能向接入网设备发送上行参考信号,而无需完成随机接入,或者说,终端设备在无需进行随机接入的情况下就能向接入网设备发送上行参考信号,从而网络就能对该终端设备进行定位。通过本申请实施例提供的方案,减少了终端设备在被定位前原本需要执行的随机接入等通信流程,能够简化定位过程。而且由于减少了终端设备需要执行的通信流程,则无需在终端设备内部置入随机接入相关的代码,由此能够减小终端设备的存储空间,从而节省终端设备的功耗。另外,包括了定位信息的系统信息为第一类型,例如第一类型的系统信息可以不包括传统的系统信息所包括的小区的公共配置信息等内容,而只是包括定位相关的信息(例如定位信息),这样可以减小第一类型的系统信息的容量,节省传输开销,也降低了终端设备的代码复杂度,进而节省了终端设备的存储空间,最终终端设备以较低的功耗能够实现定位,延长了终端设备的使用寿命。In the embodiment of the present application, the positioning information used to configure the uplink reference signal may be included in the system information, the terminal device can obtain the positioning information by receiving the system information, and the terminal device can send the uplink to the access network device after obtaining the positioning information. Reference signal without random access, in other words, the terminal device can send an uplink reference signal to the access network device without random access, so that the network can locate the terminal device. Through the solution provided by the embodiment of the present application, the communication procedures such as random access that the terminal device originally needs to perform before being positioned are reduced, and the positioning process can be simplified. Moreover, since the communication process that the terminal device needs to execute is reduced, there is no need to insert random access-related codes inside the terminal device, thereby reducing the storage space of the terminal device, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal device. In addition, the system information including positioning information is the first type. For example, the first type of system information may not include the public configuration information of the cell included in the traditional system information, but only includes positioning-related information (such as positioning information ), which can reduce the capacity of the first type of system information, save transmission overhead, and also reduce the code complexity of the terminal device, thereby saving the storage space of the terminal device, and finally the terminal device can achieve positioning with lower power consumption , prolonging the service life of the terminal equipment.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述系统信息还包括用于评估所述终端设备是否允许接入小区的信息,和/或UAC信息。例如该系统信息为SIB1,或者也可能是其他系统信息。In an optional implementation manner, the system information further includes information for evaluating whether the terminal device is allowed to access a cell, and/or UAC information. For example, the system information is SIB1, or it may be other system information.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述下行控制信道还指示所述系统信息的类型为第一类型或第二类型,包括:所述下行控制信道承载下行控制信息,所述下行控制信息包括用于指示所述系统信息的类型为所述第一类型或所述第二类型的信息;或,所述下行控制信道的加扰序列为第一序列,用于指示所述系统信息的类型为所述第一类型,或,所述下行控制信道的加扰序列为第二序列,用于指示所述系统信息的类型为所述第二类型。下行控制信道可以通过用于指示系统信息的类型的信息来指示系统信息的类型,终端设备根据该用于指示系统信息的类型的信息就能明确系统信息的类型,指示方式较为明确。或者,下行控制信道也可以通过加扰序列来指示系统信息的类型,无需通过额外的信息来进行指示,有利于节省信令开销。In an optional implementation manner, the downlink control channel further indicates that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type, including: the downlink control channel carries downlink control information, and the downlink control information includes information used to indicate that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type; or, the scrambling sequence of the downlink control channel is the first sequence, used to indicate that the type of the system information is The first type, or, the scrambling sequence of the downlink control channel is a second sequence, which is used to indicate that the type of the system information is the second type. The downlink control channel may indicate the type of the system information through information indicating the type of the system information, and the terminal device can specify the type of the system information according to the information indicating the type of the system information, and the indication method is relatively clear. Alternatively, the downlink control channel may also indicate the type of system information through a scrambling sequence, without additional information for indication, which is beneficial to save signaling overhead.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:在所述系统信息所配置的上行信道上,发送终端设备的标识,所述上行信道包括上行控制信道或上行共享信道。本申请实施例中终端设备并不进行随机接入,如果终端设备直接请求定位或者直接发送上行参考信号,可能网络无法识别终端设备的身份。因此终端设备可以将该终端设备的标识发送给接入网设备,使得网络能够明确终端设备的身份,从而对该终端设备进行定位。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: sending an identifier of the terminal device on an uplink channel configured by the system information, where the uplink channel includes an uplink control channel or an uplink shared channel. In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device does not perform random access. If the terminal device directly requests positioning or directly sends an uplink reference signal, the network may not be able to identify the identity of the terminal device. Therefore, the terminal device can send the identifier of the terminal device to the access network device, so that the network can clarify the identity of the terminal device, and thus locate the terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行信道包括所述上行控制信道,所述上行控制信道用于请求定位;或,所述上行信道包括所述上行共享信道,所述方法还包括:向所述接入网设备发送请求信息,所述请求信息用于请求定位。如果上行信道包括上行控制信道,则上行控制信道除了可以承载终端设备的标识外,还可用于请求定位。例如,该上行控制信道的格式为第一格式,第一格式的上行控制信道可用于请求定位,如果接入网设备接收了第一格式的上行控制信道,就能确定有终端设备请求定位,再根据该上行控制信道承载的终端设备的标识,就能确定请求定位的终端设备的身份。上行控制信道除了承载终端设备的标识外还用于请求定位,从而终端设备无需额外发送用于请求定位的信息,能够节省信令开销。而如果上行信道包括上行共享信道,则终端设备还可以向接入网设备发送请求信息来请求定位,使得接入网设备能够明确终端设备发送标识的目的。In an optional implementation manner, the uplink channel includes the uplink control channel, and the uplink control channel is used to request positioning; or, the uplink channel includes the uplink shared channel, and the method further includes: Send request information to the access network device, where the request information is used to request positioning. If the uplink channel includes an uplink control channel, the uplink control channel can also be used to request positioning in addition to carrying the identifier of the terminal device. For example, the format of the uplink control channel is the first format, and the uplink control channel in the first format can be used to request positioning. If the access network device receives the uplink control channel in the first format, it can be determined that there is a terminal device requesting positioning, and then According to the identification of the terminal equipment carried by the uplink control channel, the identity of the terminal equipment requesting positioning can be determined. The uplink control channel is used to request positioning in addition to carrying the identity of the terminal device, so that the terminal device does not need to send additional information for requesting positioning, which can save signaling overhead. If the uplink channel includes an uplink shared channel, the terminal device may also send request information to the access network device to request positioning, so that the access network device can clarify the purpose of the terminal device sending the identifier.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号是根据终端设备的标识确定的。终端设备可以根据终端设备的标识确定上行参考信号,而终端设备也将终端设备的标识发送给了接入网设备,则接入网设备也可以根据终端设备的标识确定上行参考信号,从而能够正确 检测上行参考信号。通过这种方式,接入网设备无需为终端设备配置上行参考信号,减少了接入网设备配置的信息量,节省了信令开销。且接入网设备和终端设备都能根据终端设备的标识确定上行参考信号,使得接入网设备和终端设备确定的上行参考信号保持一致,提高了接入网设备的检测成功率。In an optional implementation manner, the uplink reference signal is determined according to an identifier of the terminal device. The terminal device can determine the uplink reference signal according to the identifier of the terminal device, and the terminal device also sends the identifier of the terminal device to the access network device, and the access network device can also determine the uplink reference signal according to the identifier of the terminal device, so that it can correctly Detect the uplink reference signal. In this manner, the access network device does not need to configure an uplink reference signal for the terminal device, which reduces the amount of information configured by the access network device and saves signaling overhead. Moreover, both the access network device and the terminal device can determine the uplink reference signal according to the identifier of the terminal device, so that the uplink reference signals determined by the access network device and the terminal device are consistent, and the detection success rate of the access network device is improved.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号是根据终端设备的标识和所述定位信息确定的。上行参考信号根据终端设备的标识确定,例如包括不同的情况,一种情况为,上行参考信号单独根据终端设备的标识就能确定,无需再参考其他信息;另一种情况为,上行参考信号可根据终端设备的标识以及其他信息确定,一种其他信息例如为上行参考信号的配置信息。可见,上行参考信号的确定方式是较为灵活的。In an optional implementation manner, the uplink reference signal is determined according to an identifier of the terminal device and the positioning information. The uplink reference signal is determined according to the identity of the terminal equipment, for example, including different situations. In one situation, the uplink reference signal can be determined solely according to the identity of the terminal equipment without referring to other information; in another situation, the uplink reference signal can be Determined according to the identity of the terminal equipment and other information, one type of other information is, for example, configuration information of an uplink reference signal. It can be seen that the way of determining the uplink reference signal is relatively flexible.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述定位信息包括如下一项或多项:所述上行参考信号的带宽信息,所述上行参考信号的周期,所述上行参考信号占用的符号个数,或,所述上行参考信号在频域的梳齿信息。上行参考信号的配置信息可配置上行参考信号相关的各类参数,如上只是几种示例,除了如上参数外,该配置信息还可以配置上行参考信号的其他参数。In an optional implementation manner, the positioning information includes one or more of the following: bandwidth information of the uplink reference signal, period of the uplink reference signal, number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal, Or, the comb-tooth information of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain. The configuration information of the uplink reference signal can configure various parameters related to the uplink reference signal. The above are just a few examples. In addition to the above parameters, the configuration information can also configure other parameters of the uplink reference signal.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号的序列标识与所述终端设备的标识相同;或,所述上行参考信号的序列标识是对所述终端设备的标识取模得到的;或,所述上行参考信号的序列标识是所述终端设备的标识的一部分。上行参考信号根据终端设备的标识确定,例如包括,上行参考信号的序列标识根据终端设备的标识确定。而确定方式可能有多种,较为灵活。In an optional implementation manner, the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is the same as the identifier of the terminal device; or, the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is obtained by moduloing the identifier of the terminal device; Or, the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is part of the identifier of the terminal device. The uplink reference signal is determined according to the identifier of the terminal equipment, for example, includes that the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identifier of the terminal equipment. There may be many ways to determine, which are more flexible.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号的时域位置和/或频域位置是根据所述终端设备的标识确定的。上行参考信号根据终端设备的标识确定,例如包括,上行参考信号的时域位置和/或频域位置根据终端设备的标识确定。可理解为,上行参考信号根据终端设备的标识确定可包括,上行参考信号的序列标识根据终端设备的标识确定,和/或,上行参考信号的时域位置和/或频域位置根据终端设备的标识确定。In an optional implementation manner, the time domain position and/or the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device. The uplink reference signal is determined according to the identity of the terminal equipment, for example, includes determining the time domain position and/or the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal according to the identity of the terminal equipment. It can be understood that the determination of the uplink reference signal according to the identifier of the terminal device may include that the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device, and/or the time domain position and/or the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the terminal device's Identification is OK.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号的时域位置包括所述上行参考信号所在的时隙,所述上行参考信号所在的时隙的编号是根据所述终端设备的标识确定的,所述上行参考信号所在的时隙的编号是所述上行参考信号所在的时隙在一个系统帧内的编号。上行参考信号所在的时隙的编号可根据终端设备的标识确定,从而终端设备和接入网设备都可以根据终端设备的标识确定上行参考信号所在的时隙的编号,接入网设备能够在正确的时隙检测上行参考信号。且上行参考信号的时隙根据终端设备的标识确定,不同的终端设备发送的上行参考信号所在的时隙就可能不同,由此减小了上行参考信号之间的干扰。In an optional implementation manner, the time domain position of the uplink reference signal includes the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located, and the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device Yes, the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located is the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located within one system frame. The number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located can be determined according to the identifier of the terminal device, so that both the terminal device and the access network device can determine the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located according to the identifier of the terminal device, and the access network device can be in the correct time slot to detect the uplink reference signal. In addition, the time slots of the uplink reference signals are determined according to the identification of the terminal equipment, and the time slots of the uplink reference signals sent by different terminal equipment may be different, thereby reducing the interference between the uplink reference signals.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号的时域位置包括所述上行参考信号的起始符号,其中,所述上行参考信号的起始符号的编号是根据所述终端设备的标识和第一信息确定的,所述第一信息包括所述上行参考信号占用的符号个数和/或一个时隙包括的符号个数。上行参考信号的起始符号的编号可根据终端设备的标识和第一信息确定,从而终端设备和接入网设备都可以根据终端设备的标识和第一信息确定上行参考信号的起始符号,接入网设备能够在正确的符号上检测上行参考信号。且上行参考信号的起始符号根据终端设备的标识确定,不同的终端设备发送的上行参考信号的起始符号就可能不同,由此减小了上行参考信号之间的干扰。In an optional implementation manner, the time domain position of the uplink reference signal includes a start symbol of the uplink reference signal, where the number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal is based on the number of the terminal device identified by the identifier and first information, where the first information includes the number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal and/or the number of symbols included in a time slot. The number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal can be determined according to the identifier of the terminal device and the first information, so that both the terminal device and the access network device can determine the start symbol of the uplink reference signal according to the identifier of the terminal device and the first information, and then The network access device can detect the uplink reference signal on the correct symbol. Moreover, the start symbol of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identifier of the terminal equipment, and the start symbol of the uplink reference signal sent by different terminal equipment may be different, thereby reducing the interference between the uplink reference signals.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号的频域位置包括所述上行参考信号的频 域起始位置,所述上行参考信号的频域起始位置所在的子载波的编号是根据所述终端设备的标识和所述上行参考信号在频域的梳齿信息确定的。上行参考信号的频域起始位置可根据终端设备的标识确定,从而终端设备和接入网设备都可以根据终端设备的标识确定上行参考信号的频域起始位置,接入网设备能够在正确的频域位置上检测上行参考信号。且上行参考信号的频域起始位置根据终端设备的标识确定,不同的终端设备发送的上行参考信号的频域位置就可能不同,由此减小了上行参考信号之间的干扰。In an optional implementation manner, the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal includes the frequency domain starting position of the uplink reference signal, and the number of the subcarrier where the frequency domain starting position of the uplink reference signal is located is It is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device and the comb tooth information of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain. The starting position of the frequency domain of the uplink reference signal can be determined according to the identifier of the terminal device, so that both the terminal device and the access network device can determine the starting position of the frequency domain of the uplink reference signal according to the identifier of the terminal device, and the access network device can correctly The uplink reference signal is detected at the frequency domain position of . In addition, the starting position of the frequency domain of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identifier of the terminal equipment, and the frequency domain positions of the uplink reference signals sent by different terminal equipment may be different, thereby reducing the interference between the uplink reference signals.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号为定位SRS或测距SRS。本申请实施例中的上行参考信号可以是定位专用的参考信号或测距专用的参考信号,即,该上行参考信号是用于定位或用于测距。或者,本申请实施例也可以不限制上行参考信号的用途。该上行参考信号例如为SRS,或者也可以是其他的上行方向上的参考信号。In an optional implementation manner, the uplink reference signal is a positioning SRS or a ranging SRS. The uplink reference signal in the embodiment of the present application may be a positioning-specific reference signal or a ranging-specific reference signal, that is, the uplink reference signal is used for positioning or ranging. Alternatively, the embodiment of the present application may not limit the use of the uplink reference signal. The uplink reference signal is, for example, an SRS, or may also be other reference signals in the uplink direction.
在一种可选的实施方式中,终端设备仅用于定位。本申请实施例中,该终端设备可以是定位专用的终端设备,例如该终端设备仅有定位需求,并没有通信等其他需求。或者,该终端设备也可以是普通的终端设备,具体不做限制。In an optional implementation manner, the terminal device is only used for positioning. In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may be a positioning-specific terminal device, for example, the terminal device only needs positioning and has no other needs such as communication. Alternatively, the terminal device may also be a common terminal device, which is not specifically limited.
第二方面,提供第二种通信方法,该方法可由接入网设备执行,或由包括接入网设备功能的其他设备执行,或由芯片系统或其他功能模块执行,该芯片系统或功能模块能够实现接入网设备的功能,该芯片系统或功能模块例如设置在接入网设备中。接入网设备例如为基站。该方法包括:发送下行控制信道,所述下行控制信道用于调度系统信息,且所述下行控制信道还指示所述系统信息的类型为第一类型或第二类型,所述第一类型的系统信息包括定位信息,所述第二类型的系统信息不包括所述定位信息,所述定位信息包括用于配置上行参考信号的信息;发送所述系统信息;如果所述系统信息的类型为所述第一类型,从终端设备接收上行参考信号。In the second aspect, a second communication method is provided, which can be performed by an access network device, or by other devices including access network device functions, or by a chip system or other functional modules, and the chip system or functional modules can To realize the function of the access network device, the chip system or the functional module is set in the access network device, for example. The access network device is, for example, a base station. The method includes: sending a downlink control channel, the downlink control channel is used to schedule system information, and the downlink control channel also indicates that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type, and the system information of the first type The information includes positioning information, the second type of system information does not include the positioning information, and the positioning information includes information for configuring an uplink reference signal; sending the system information; if the type of the system information is the The first type is to receive an uplink reference signal from a terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述系统信息还包括用于评估所述终端设备是否允许接入小区的信息,和/或UAC信息。In an optional implementation manner, the system information further includes information for evaluating whether the terminal device is allowed to access a cell, and/or UAC information.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述下行控制信道还指示所述系统信息的类型为第一类型或第二类型,包括:所述下行控制信道承载下行控制信息,所述下行控制信息包括用于指示所述系统信息的类型为所述第一类型或所述第二类型的信息;或,所述下行控制信道的加扰序列为第一序列,用于指示所述系统信息的类型为所述第一类型,或,所述下行控制信道的加扰序列为第二序列,用于指示所述系统信息的类型为所述第二类型。In an optional implementation manner, the downlink control channel further indicates that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type, including: the downlink control channel carries downlink control information, and the downlink control information includes information used to indicate that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type; or, the scrambling sequence of the downlink control channel is the first sequence, used to indicate that the type of the system information is The first type, or, the scrambling sequence of the downlink control channel is a second sequence, which is used to indicate that the type of the system information is the second type.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:在所述第五信息所配置的上行信道上,发送终端设备的标识,所述上行信道包括上行控制信道或上行共享信道。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: sending an identifier of the terminal device on an uplink channel configured by the fifth information, where the uplink channel includes an uplink control channel or an uplink shared channel.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行信道包括所述上行控制信道,所述上行控制信道用于请求定位;或,所述上行信道包括所述上行共享信道,所述方法还包括:从所述终端设备接收请求信息,所述请求信息用于请求定位。In an optional implementation manner, the uplink channel includes the uplink control channel, and the uplink control channel is used to request positioning; or, the uplink channel includes the uplink shared channel, and the method further includes: Receive request information from the terminal device, where the request information is used to request positioning.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号是根据所述终端设备的标识确定的。In an optional implementation manner, the uplink reference signal is determined according to an identifier of the terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号是根据所述终端设备的标识和所述定位信息确定的。In an optional implementation manner, the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device and the positioning information.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述定位信息包括如下一项或多项:所述上行参考信号的带宽信息,所述上行参考信号的周期,所述上行参考信号占用的符号个数,或,所述上行参考信号在频域的梳齿信息。In an optional implementation manner, the positioning information includes one or more of the following: bandwidth information of the uplink reference signal, period of the uplink reference signal, number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal, Or, the comb-tooth information of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号的序列标识与所述终端设备的标识相同; 或,所述上行参考信号的序列标识是对所述终端设备的标识取模得到的;或,所述上行参考信号的序列标识是所述终端设备的标识的一部分。In an optional implementation manner, the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is the same as the identifier of the terminal device; or, the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is obtained by moduloing the identifier of the terminal device; Or, the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is part of the identifier of the terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号的时域位置和/或频域位置是根据所述终端设备的标识确定的。In an optional implementation manner, the time domain position and/or the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号的时域位置包括所述上行参考信号所在的时隙,所述上行参考信号所在的时隙的编号是根据所述终端设备的标识确定的,所述上行参考信号所在的时隙的编号是所述上行参考信号所在的时隙在一个系统帧内的编号。In an optional implementation manner, the time domain position of the uplink reference signal includes the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located, and the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device Yes, the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located is the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located within one system frame.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号的时域位置包括所述上行参考信号的起始符号,其中,所述上行参考信号的起始符号的编号是根据所述终端设备的标识和第一信息确定的,所述第一信息包括所述上行参考信号占用的符号个数和/或一个时隙包括的符号个数。In an optional implementation manner, the time domain position of the uplink reference signal includes a start symbol of the uplink reference signal, where the number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal is based on the number of the terminal device identified by the identifier and first information, where the first information includes the number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal and/or the number of symbols included in a time slot.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号的频域位置包括所述上行参考信号的频域起始位置,所述上行参考信号的频域起始位置所在的子载波的编号是根据所述终端设备的标识和所述上行参考信号在频域的梳齿信息确定的。In an optional implementation manner, the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal includes the frequency domain starting position of the uplink reference signal, and the number of the subcarrier where the frequency domain starting position of the uplink reference signal is located is It is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device and the comb tooth information of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:向核心网设备发送第一定位请求,所述第一定位请求包括所述终端设备的标识,用于请求对所述终端设备进行定位。例如第一定位请求包括该终端设备的标识,从而核心网设备可将该终端设备的标识发送给定位服务器,使得定位服务器能够将该终端设备的标识发送给多个接入网设备,从而这多个接入网设备可联合实现对该终端设备的定位。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: sending a first positioning request to a core network device, where the first positioning request includes the identifier of the terminal device, and is used for requesting to locate the terminal device . For example, the first positioning request includes the identifier of the terminal device, so that the core network device can send the identifier of the terminal device to the positioning server, so that the positioning server can send the identifier of the terminal device to multiple access network devices, so that multiple The access network devices can jointly realize the positioning of the terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:对所述上行参考信号进行测量,得到测量结果;向定位服务器发送所述测量结果,所述测量结果用于对所述终端设备进行定位。接入网设备可接收上行参考信号,并对接收的上行参考信号进行测量,得到的测量结果可发送给定位服务器,从而定位服务器根据测量结果就能确定该终端设备的位置,由此实现了对该终端设备的定位。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: measuring the uplink reference signal to obtain a measurement result; sending the measurement result to a positioning server, and the measurement result is used to perform a measurement on the terminal device position. The access network device can receive the uplink reference signal, and measure the received uplink reference signal, and the obtained measurement result can be sent to the positioning server, so that the positioning server can determine the position of the terminal device according to the measurement result, thereby realizing the The location of the end device.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号为定位SRS。In an optional implementation manner, the uplink reference signal is a positioning SRS.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述终端设备仅用于定位。In an optional implementation manner, the terminal device is only used for positioning.
关于第二方面或各种可选的实施方式所带来的技术效果,可参考对于第一方面或相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。Regarding the technical effects brought about by the second aspect or various optional implementation manners, reference may be made to the introduction of the technical effects of the first aspect or corresponding implementation manners.
第三方面,提供第三种通信方法,该方法可由终端设备执行,或由包括终端设备功能的其他设备执行,或由芯片系统或其他功能模块执行,该芯片系统或功能模块能够实现终端设备的功能,该芯片系统或功能模块例如设置在终端设备中。该方法包括:接收下行广播信道,所述下行广播信道包括下行控制信道的配置信息;接收所述下行控制信道,所述下行控制信道承载定位信息,所述定位信息包括用于配置上行参考信号的信息;根据所述定位信息,向所述接入网设备发送上行参考信号。In the third aspect, a third communication method is provided, which can be executed by a terminal device, or by other devices including the functions of the terminal device, or by a chip system or other functional modules, and the chip system or functional modules can realize the functions of the terminal device function, the chip system or functional module is, for example, set in a terminal device. The method includes: receiving a downlink broadcast channel, where the downlink broadcast channel includes configuration information of a downlink control channel; receiving the downlink control channel, where the downlink control channel carries positioning information, and the positioning information includes configuration information for configuring an uplink reference signal information; sending an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information.
本申请实施例中,终端设备通过下行控制信道就获得了定位信息,从而终端设备不仅无需进行随机接入,甚至无需接收系统信息就能实现定位,减少了终端设备在被定位前原本需要执行的接收系统信息以及随机接入等通信流程,能够简化定位过程。而且由于减少了终端设备需要执行的通信流程,则无需在终端设备内部置入随机接入相关的代码,由此能够减小终端设备的存储空间,从而节省终端设备的功耗。对于某些场景,例如资产盘点、物流跟踪、电子围栏等场景,对于定位的功耗有较高的需求,例如需维持6到18个月的 使用寿命,而这些场景对通信的需求远远小于对定位的需求。因此如果将本申请实施例的技术方案应用于这些场景,则终端设备由于无需执行随机接入等通信流程,可以有助于维持较长的使用寿命。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device obtains the positioning information through the downlink control channel, so that the terminal device not only does not need to perform random access, but also can realize positioning without receiving system information, which reduces the number of tasks that the terminal device originally needs to perform before being positioned. Receiving system information and communication processes such as random access can simplify the positioning process. Moreover, since the communication process that the terminal device needs to execute is reduced, there is no need to insert random access-related codes inside the terminal device, thereby reducing the storage space of the terminal device, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal device. For some scenarios, such as asset inventory, logistics tracking, electronic fence and other scenarios, there is a high demand for positioning power consumption, such as the need to maintain a service life of 6 to 18 months, and these scenarios have far less demand for communication than The need for positioning. Therefore, if the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application are applied to these scenarios, since the terminal device does not need to perform communication procedures such as random access, it can help maintain a longer service life.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述下行广播信道指示所述下行控制信道的类型为第一类型,所述第一类型的下行控制信道承载的下行控制信息包括所述定位信息;或,所述下行控制信道的加扰序列为第一序列,所述第一序列用于指示所述下行控制信道承载的下行控制信息包括所述定位信息。下行广播信道可以指示下行控制信道的类型,例如对于本申请实施例的终端设备来说,如果下行广播信道指示下行控制信道的类型为第一类型,则终端设备可以检测下行控制信道,而如果下行广播信道指示下行控制信道的类型为第二类型,则终端设备可以不必检测下行控制信道,由此能够减小终端设备的功耗。或者,下行控制信道的类型也可以通过下行控制信道的加扰序列来指示,这种方式无需增加额外的指示信息,能够节省信令开销。In an optional implementation manner, the downlink broadcast channel indicates that the type of the downlink control channel is a first type, and the downlink control information carried by the downlink control channel of the first type includes the positioning information; or, The scrambling sequence of the downlink control channel is a first sequence, and the first sequence is used to indicate that the downlink control information carried by the downlink control channel includes the positioning information. The downlink broadcast channel may indicate the type of the downlink control channel. For example, for the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application, if the downlink broadcast channel indicates that the type of the downlink control channel is the first type, the terminal device may detect the downlink control channel, and if the downlink The broadcast channel indicates that the type of the downlink control channel is the second type, and the terminal device does not need to detect the downlink control channel, thereby reducing power consumption of the terminal device. Alternatively, the type of the downlink control channel may also be indicated through the scrambling sequence of the downlink control channel. This way does not need to add additional indication information and can save signaling overhead.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:在所述定位信息所配置的上行信道上,发送终端设备的标识,所述上行信道包括上行控制信道或上行共享信道。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: sending an identifier of the terminal device on an uplink channel configured in the positioning information, where the uplink channel includes an uplink control channel or an uplink shared channel.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行信道包括所述上行控制信道,所述上行控制信道用于请求定位;或,所述上行信道包括所述上行共享信道,所述方法还包括:向所述接入网设备发送请求信息,所述请求信息用于请求定位。In an optional implementation manner, the uplink channel includes the uplink control channel, and the uplink control channel is used to request positioning; or, the uplink channel includes the uplink shared channel, and the method further includes: Send request information to the access network device, where the request information is used to request positioning.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号是根据终端设备的标识确定的。In an optional implementation manner, the uplink reference signal is determined according to an identifier of the terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号是根据终端设备的标识和所述定位信息确定的。In an optional implementation manner, the uplink reference signal is determined according to an identifier of the terminal device and the positioning information.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述定位信息包括如下一项或多项:所述上行参考信号的带宽信息,所述上行参考信号的周期,所述上行参考信号占用的符号个数,或,所述上行参考信号在频域的梳齿信息。In an optional implementation manner, the positioning information includes one or more of the following: bandwidth information of the uplink reference signal, period of the uplink reference signal, number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal, Or, the comb-tooth information of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号的序列标识与所述终端设备的标识相同;或,所述上行参考信号的序列标识是对所述终端设备的标识取模得到的;或,所述上行参考信号的序列标识是所述终端设备的标识的一部分。In an optional implementation manner, the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is the same as the identifier of the terminal device; or, the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is obtained by moduloing the identifier of the terminal device; Or, the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is part of the identifier of the terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号的时域位置和/或频域位置是根据所述终端设备的标识确定的。In an optional implementation manner, the time domain position and/or the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号的时域位置包括所述上行参考信号所在的时隙,所述上行参考信号所在的时隙的编号是根据所述终端设备的标识确定的,所述上行参考信号所在的时隙的编号是所述上行参考信号所在的时隙在一个系统帧内的编号。In an optional implementation manner, the time domain position of the uplink reference signal includes the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located, and the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device Yes, the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located is the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located within one system frame.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号的时域位置包括所述上行参考信号的起始符号,其中,所述上行参考信号的起始符号的编号是根据所述终端设备的标识和第一信息确定的,所述第一信息包括所述上行参考信号占用的符号个数和/或一个时隙包括的符号个数。In an optional implementation manner, the time domain position of the uplink reference signal includes a start symbol of the uplink reference signal, where the number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal is based on the number of the terminal device identified by the identifier and first information, where the first information includes the number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal and/or the number of symbols included in a time slot.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号的频域位置包括所述上行参考信号的频域起始位置,所述上行参考信号的频域起始位置所在的子载波的编号是根据所述终端设备的标识和所述上行参考信号在频域的梳齿信息确定的。In an optional implementation manner, the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal includes the frequency domain starting position of the uplink reference signal, and the number of the subcarrier where the frequency domain starting position of the uplink reference signal is located is It is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device and the comb tooth information of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号为定位SRS。In an optional implementation manner, the uplink reference signal is a positioning SRS.
在一种可选的实施方式中,终端设备仅用于定位。In an optional implementation manner, the terminal device is only used for positioning.
关于第三方面的一些可选的实施方式所带来的技术效果,可参考对于第一方面或相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。Regarding the technical effects brought about by some optional implementations of the third aspect, reference may be made to the introduction of the technical effects of the first aspect or corresponding implementations.
第四方面,提供第四种通信方法,该方法可由接入网设备执行,或由包括接入网设备功能的其他设备执行,或由芯片系统或其他功能模块执行,该芯片系统或功能模块能够实现接入网设备的功能,该芯片系统或功能模块例如设置在接入网设备中。接入网设备例如为基站。该方法包括:发送下行广播信道,所述下行广播信道包括下行控制信道的配置信息;发送所述下行控制信道,所述下行控制信道承载定位信息,所述定位信息包括用于配置上行参考信号的信息;根据所述定位信息,从终端设备接收上行参考信号。In the fourth aspect, a fourth communication method is provided, which can be performed by an access network device, or by other devices including access network device functions, or by a chip system or other functional modules, and the chip system or functional modules can To realize the function of the access network device, the chip system or the functional module is set in the access network device, for example. The access network device is, for example, a base station. The method includes: sending a downlink broadcast channel, where the downlink broadcast channel includes configuration information of a downlink control channel; sending the downlink control channel, where the downlink control channel carries positioning information, and the positioning information includes configuration information for configuring an uplink reference signal Information; according to the positioning information, receive an uplink reference signal from a terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述下行广播信道指示所述下行控制信道的类型为第一类型,所述第一类型的下行控制信道承载的下行控制信息包括所述定位信息;或,所述下行控制信道的加扰序列为第一序列,所述第一序列用于指示所述下行控制信道承载的下行控制信息包括所述定位信息。In an optional implementation manner, the downlink broadcast channel indicates that the type of the downlink control channel is a first type, and the downlink control information carried by the downlink control channel of the first type includes the positioning information; or, The scrambling sequence of the downlink control channel is a first sequence, and the first sequence is used to indicate that the downlink control information carried by the downlink control channel includes the positioning information.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:在所述定位信息所配置的上行信道上,接收所述终端设备的标识,所述上行信道包括上行控制信道或上行共享信道。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: receiving the identifier of the terminal device on an uplink channel configured by the positioning information, where the uplink channel includes an uplink control channel or an uplink shared channel.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行信道包括所述上行控制信道,所述上行控制信道用于请求定位;或,所述上行信道包括所述上行共享信道,所述方法还包括:从所述终端设备接收请求信息,所述请求信息用于请求定位。In an optional implementation manner, the uplink channel includes the uplink control channel, and the uplink control channel is used to request positioning; or, the uplink channel includes the uplink shared channel, and the method further includes: Receive request information from the terminal device, where the request information is used to request positioning.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号是根据所述终端设备的标识确定的。In an optional implementation manner, the uplink reference signal is determined according to an identifier of the terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号是根据所述终端设备的标识和所述定位信息确定的。In an optional implementation manner, the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device and the positioning information.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述定位信息包括如下一项或多项:所述上行参考信号的带宽信息,所述上行参考信号的周期,所述上行参考信号占用的符号个数,或,所述上行参考信号在频域的梳齿信息。In an optional implementation manner, the positioning information includes one or more of the following: bandwidth information of the uplink reference signal, period of the uplink reference signal, number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal, Or, the comb-tooth information of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号的序列标识与所述终端设备的标识相同;或,所述上行参考信号的序列标识是对所述终端设备的标识取模得到的;或,所述上行参考信号的序列标识是所述终端设备的标识的一部分。In an optional implementation manner, the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is the same as the identifier of the terminal device; or, the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is obtained by moduloing the identifier of the terminal device; Or, the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is part of the identifier of the terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号的时域位置和/或频域位置是根据所述终端设备的标识确定的。In an optional implementation manner, the time domain position and/or the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号的时域位置包括所述上行参考信号所在的时隙,所述上行参考信号所在的时隙的编号是根据所述终端设备的标识确定的,所述上行参考信号所在的时隙的编号是所述上行参考信号所在的时隙在一个系统帧内的编号。In an optional implementation manner, the time domain position of the uplink reference signal includes the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located, and the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device Yes, the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located is the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located within one system frame.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号的时域位置包括所述上行参考信号的起始符号,其中,所述上行参考信号的起始符号的编号是根据所述终端设备的标识和第一信息确定的,所述第一信息包括所述上行参考信号占用的符号个数和/或一个时隙包括的符号个数。In an optional implementation manner, the time domain position of the uplink reference signal includes a start symbol of the uplink reference signal, where the number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal is based on the number of the terminal device identified by the identifier and first information, where the first information includes the number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal and/or the number of symbols included in a time slot.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号的频域位置包括所述上行参考信号的频域起始位置,所述上行参考信号的频域起始位置所在的子载波的编号是根据所述终端设备的标识和所述上行参考信号在频域的梳齿信息确定的。In an optional implementation manner, the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal includes the frequency domain starting position of the uplink reference signal, and the number of the subcarrier where the frequency domain starting position of the uplink reference signal is located is It is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device and the comb tooth information of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:向核心网设备发送第一定位请求,所述第一定位请求包括所述终端设备的标识,用于请求对所述终端设备进行定位。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: sending a first positioning request to a core network device, where the first positioning request includes the identifier of the terminal device, and is used for requesting to locate the terminal device .
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:对所述上行参考信号进行测量,得到测量结果;向定位服务器发送所述测量结果,所述测量结果用于对所述终端设备进行定位。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: measuring the uplink reference signal to obtain a measurement result; sending the measurement result to a positioning server, and the measurement result is used to perform a measurement on the terminal device position.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述上行参考信号为定位SRS。In an optional implementation manner, the uplink reference signal is a positioning SRS.
在一种可选的实施方式中,所述终端设备仅用于定位。In an optional implementation manner, the terminal device is only used for positioning.
关于第四方面或第四方面的各种可选的实施方式所带来的技术效果,可参考对于第二方面或相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。Regarding the technical effects brought about by the fourth aspect or various optional implementation manners of the fourth aspect, reference may be made to the introduction of the technical effects of the second aspect or corresponding implementation manners.
第五方面,提供一种通信系统,该通信系统包括终端设备和接入网设备,该接入网设备例如为第一方面和/或第二方面所述的接入网设备,该终端设备例如为第一方面和/或第二方面所述的终端设备。例如,所述接入网设备,用于发送下行控制信道,所述终端设备,用于从所述接入网设备接收所述下行控制信道,所述下行控制信道用于调度系统信息,且所述下行控制信道还指示所述系统信息的类型为第一类型或第二类型,所述第一类型的系统信息包括定位信息,所述第二类型的系统信息不包括所述定位信息,所述定位信息包括用于配置上行参考信号的信息;所述接入网设备,还用于发送所述系统信息,所述终端设备,还用于如果所述下行控制信道指示所述系统信息的类型为所述第一类型,检测所述系统信息;所述终端设备,还用于根据所述定位信息,向所述接入网设备发送上行参考信号,所述接入网设备,还用于如果所述系统信息的类型为所述第一类型,从终端设备接收上行参考信号。A fifth aspect provides a communication system, the communication system includes a terminal device and an access network device, the access network device is, for example, the access network device described in the first aspect and/or the second aspect, and the terminal device is, for example, It is the terminal device described in the first aspect and/or the second aspect. For example, the access network device is configured to send a downlink control channel, the terminal device is configured to receive the downlink control channel from the access network device, the downlink control channel is used to schedule system information, and the The downlink control channel also indicates that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type, the system information of the first type includes positioning information, the system information of the second type does not include the positioning information, and the system information of the second type does not include the positioning information. The positioning information includes information for configuring an uplink reference signal; the access network device is further configured to send the system information, and the terminal device is further configured to transmit the system information if the downlink control channel indicates that the type of the system information is The first type is to detect the system information; the terminal device is further configured to send an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information, and the access network device is further configured to if the The type of the system information is the first type, and an uplink reference signal is received from the terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中,该通信系统还包括第一方面和/或第二方面所述的定位服务器。In an optional implementation manner, the communication system further includes the positioning server described in the first aspect and/or the second aspect.
关于该通信系统中的各个设备所能够实现的方法,以及相应的技术效果等,可参考第一方面和/或第二方面的介绍。For the methods that can be implemented by each device in the communication system, as well as the corresponding technical effects, etc., reference may be made to the introduction of the first aspect and/or the second aspect.
第六方面,提供一种通信系统,该通信系统包括终端设备和接入网设备,该接入网设备例如为第三方面和/或第四方面所述的接入网设备,该终端设备例如为第三方面和/或第四方面所述的终端设备。例如,所述接入网设备,用于发送下行广播信道,所述终端设备,用于接收所述下行广播信道,所述下行广播信道包括下行控制信道的配置信息;所述接入网设备,还用于发送所述下行控制信道,所述终端设备,还用于接收所述下行控制信道,所述下行控制信道承载定位信息,所述定位信息包括用于配置上行参考信号的信息;所述终端设备,还用于根据所述定位信息,向所述接入网设备发送上行参考信号,所述接入网设备,还用于根据所述定位信息,从终端设备接收上行参考信号。According to a sixth aspect, a communication system is provided. The communication system includes a terminal device and an access network device. The access network device is, for example, the access network device described in the third aspect and/or the fourth aspect. The terminal device is, for example, It is the terminal device described in the third aspect and/or the fourth aspect. For example, the access network device is configured to send a downlink broadcast channel, the terminal device is configured to receive the downlink broadcast channel, and the downlink broadcast channel includes configuration information of a downlink control channel; the access network device, It is also used to send the downlink control channel, and the terminal device is also used to receive the downlink control channel, the downlink control channel carries positioning information, and the positioning information includes information for configuring an uplink reference signal; the The terminal device is further configured to send an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information, and the access network device is further configured to receive an uplink reference signal from the terminal device according to the positioning information.
在一种可选的实施方式中,该通信系统还包括第三方面和/或第四方面所述的定位服务器。In an optional implementation manner, the communication system further includes the positioning server described in the third aspect and/or the fourth aspect.
关于该通信系统中的各个设备所能够实现的方法,以及相应的技术效果等,可参考第三方面和/或第四方面的介绍。For the methods that can be implemented by each device in the communication system, as well as the corresponding technical effects, etc., reference may be made to the introduction of the third aspect and/or the fourth aspect.
第七方面,提供一种通信装置。所述通信装置可以为上述第一方面至第六方面中的任意一方面所述的终端设备。所述通信装置具备上述终端设备的功能。所述通信装置例如为终端设备,或为终端设备中的功能模块,例如基带装置或芯片系统等。一种可选的实现方式中,所述通信装置包括基带装置和射频装置。另一种可选的实现方式中,所述通信装置包括处理单元(有时也称为处理模块)和收发单元(有时也称为收发模块)。收发单元能够实现发送功能和接收功能,在收发单元实现发送功能时,可称为发送单元(有时也称为发送模块),在收发单元实现接收功能时,可称为接收单元(有时也称为接收模块)。发送 单元和接收单元可以是同一个功能模块,该功能模块称为收发单元,该功能模块能实现发送功能和接收功能;或者,发送单元和接收单元可以是不同的功能模块,收发单元是对这些功能模块的统称。In a seventh aspect, a communication device is provided. The communication device may be the terminal device described in any one of the first aspect to the sixth aspect. The communication device has the functions of the terminal device described above. The communication device is, for example, a terminal device, or a functional module in the terminal device, such as a baseband device or a chip system. In an optional implementation manner, the communication device includes a baseband device and a radio frequency device. In another optional implementation manner, the communication device includes a processing unit (also called a processing module sometimes) and a transceiver unit (also called a transceiver module sometimes). The transceiver unit can realize the sending function and the receiving function. When the transceiver unit realizes the sending function, it can be called the sending unit (sometimes also called the sending module). When the transceiver unit realizes the receiving function, it can be called the receiving unit (sometimes also called receiving module). The sending unit and the receiving unit can be the same functional module, which is called the transceiver unit, and this functional module can realize the sending function and the receiving function; or, the sending unit and the receiving unit can be different functional modules, and the transceiver unit is for these A general term for functional modules.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述收发单元,用于从接入网设备接收下行控制信道,所述下行控制信道用于调度系统信息,且所述下行控制信道还指示所述系统信息的类型为第一类型或第二类型,所述第一类型的系统信息包括定位信息,所述第二类型的系统信息不包括所述定位信息,所述定位信息包括用于配置上行参考信号的信息;所述处理单元,用于如果所述下行控制信道指示所述系统信息的类型为所述第一类型,通过所述收发单元检测所述系统信息;所述处理单元,还用于根据所述定位信息,通过所述收发单元向所述接入网设备发送上行参考信号。或者,所述收发单元,用于从接入网设备接收下行控制信道,所述下行控制信道用于调度系统信息,且所述下行控制信道还指示所述系统信息的类型为第一类型或第二类型,所述第一类型的系统信息包括定位信息,所述第二类型的系统信息不包括所述定位信息,所述定位信息包括用于配置上行参考信号的信息;所述收发单元,还用于如果所述下行控制信道指示所述系统信息的类型为所述第一类型,检测所述系统信息;所述收发单元,还用于根据所述定位信息,向所述接入网设备发送上行参考信号。In an optional implementation manner, the transceiver unit is configured to receive a downlink control channel from an access network device, the downlink control channel is used to schedule system information, and the downlink control channel also indicates the system information The type is the first type or the second type, the system information of the first type includes positioning information, the system information of the second type does not include the positioning information, and the positioning information includes information; the processing unit is configured to detect the system information through the transceiver unit if the downlink control channel indicates that the type of the system information is the first type; the processing unit is also configured to detect the system information according to the the positioning information, and send an uplink reference signal to the access network device through the transceiver unit. Alternatively, the transceiver unit is configured to receive a downlink control channel from an access network device, the downlink control channel is used to schedule system information, and the downlink control channel also indicates that the type of the system information is the first type or the second Two types, the system information of the first type includes positioning information, the system information of the second type does not include the positioning information, and the positioning information includes information for configuring uplink reference signals; the transceiver unit further It is configured to detect the system information if the downlink control channel indicates that the type of the system information is the first type; the transceiver unit is further configured to send the location information to the access network device Uplink reference signal.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述收发单元,用于接收下行广播信道,所述下行广播信道包括下行控制信道的配置信息;所述收发单元,还用于接收所述下行控制信道,所述下行控制信道承载定位信息,所述定位信息包括用于配置上行参考信号的信息;所述处理单元,用于根据所述定位信息,通过所述收发单元向所述接入网设备发送上行参考信号。或者,所述收发单元,用于接收下行广播信道,所述下行广播信道包括下行控制信道的配置信息;所述收发单元,还用于接收所述下行控制信道,所述下行控制信道承载定位信息,所述定位信息包括用于配置上行参考信号的信息;所述收发单元,还用于根据所述定位信息,向所述接入网设备发送上行参考信号。In an optional implementation manner, the transceiver unit is configured to receive a downlink broadcast channel, and the downlink broadcast channel includes configuration information of a downlink control channel; the transceiver unit is also configured to receive the downlink control channel, The downlink control channel carries positioning information, and the positioning information includes information for configuring an uplink reference signal; the processing unit is configured to send an uplink signal to the access network device through the transceiver unit according to the positioning information reference signal. Alternatively, the transceiver unit is configured to receive a downlink broadcast channel, the downlink broadcast channel includes configuration information of a downlink control channel; the transceiver unit is also configured to receive the downlink control channel, and the downlink control channel carries positioning information The positioning information includes information for configuring an uplink reference signal; the transceiving unit is further configured to send an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述通信装置还包括存储单元(有时也称为存储模块),所述处理单元用于与所述存储单元耦合,并执行所述存储单元中的程序或指令,使能所述通信装置执行上述第一方面至第六方面中的任意一方面所述的终端设备的功能。In an optional implementation manner, the communication device further includes a storage unit (sometimes referred to as a storage module), and the processing unit is configured to be coupled with the storage unit and execute programs or An instruction to enable the communication device to execute the function of the terminal device described in any one of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.
第八方面,提供一种通信装置。所述通信装置可以为上述第一方面至第六方面中的任意一方面所述的接入网设备。所述通信装置具备上述接入网设备的功能。所述通信装置例如为接入网设备,或为接入网设备中的功能模块,例如基带装置或芯片系统等。一种可选的实现方式中,所述通信装置包括基带装置和射频装置。另一种可选的实现方式中,所述通信装置包括处理单元(有时也称为处理模块)和收发单元(有时也称为收发模块)。关于收发单元的实现方式可参考第七方面的介绍。In an eighth aspect, a communication device is provided. The communication device may be the access network device described in any one of the first aspect to the sixth aspect. The communication device has the functions of the above-mentioned access network equipment. The communication device is, for example, an access network device, or a functional module in the access network device, such as a baseband device or a chip system. In an optional implementation manner, the communication device includes a baseband device and a radio frequency device. In another optional implementation manner, the communication device includes a processing unit (also called a processing module sometimes) and a transceiver unit (also called a transceiver module sometimes). For the implementation of the transceiver unit, refer to the introduction of the seventh aspect.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述收发单元,用于发送下行控制信道,所述下行控制信道用于调度系统信息,且所述下行控制信道还指示所述系统信息的类型为第一类型或第二类型,所述第一类型的系统信息包括定位信息,所述第二类型的系统信息不包括所述定位信息,所述定位信息包括用于配置上行参考信号的信息;所述收发单元,还用于发送所述系统信息;所述处理单元,用于如果所述系统信息的类型为所述第一类型,通过所述收发单元从终端设备接收上行参考信号。或者,所述收发单元,用于发送下行控制信道,所述下行控制信道用于调度系统信息,且所述下行控制信道还指示所述系统信息的类型为第一类型或第二类型,所述第一类型的系统信息包括定位信息,所述第二类型的系统信息不包 括所述定位信息,所述定位信息包括用于配置上行参考信号的信息;所述收发单元,还用于发送所述系统信息;所述收发单元,还用于如果所述系统信息的类型为所述第一类型,从终端设备接收上行参考信号。In an optional implementation manner, the transceiver unit is configured to send a downlink control channel, the downlink control channel is used to schedule system information, and the downlink control channel also indicates that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type, the system information of the first type includes positioning information, the system information of the second type does not include the positioning information, and the positioning information includes information for configuring uplink reference signals; the sending and receiving The unit is further configured to send the system information; the processing unit is configured to receive an uplink reference signal from a terminal device through the transceiver unit if the type of the system information is the first type. Alternatively, the transceiver unit is configured to send a downlink control channel, the downlink control channel is used to schedule system information, and the downlink control channel also indicates that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type, the The first type of system information includes positioning information, the second type of system information does not include the positioning information, and the positioning information includes information for configuring an uplink reference signal; the transceiver unit is further configured to send the System information: the transceiving unit is further configured to receive an uplink reference signal from a terminal device if the type of the system information is the first type.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述收发单元,用于发送下行广播信道,所述下行广播信道包括下行控制信道的配置信息;所述收发单元,还用于发送所述下行控制信道,所述下行控制信道承载定位信息,所述定位信息包括用于配置上行参考信号的信息;所述处理单元,用于根据所述定位信息,通过所述收发单元从终端设备接收上行参考信号。或者,所述收发单元,用于发送下行广播信道,所述下行广播信道包括下行控制信道的配置信息;所述收发单元,还用于发送所述下行控制信道,所述下行控制信道承载定位信息,所述定位信息包括用于配置上行参考信号的信息;所述收发单元,还用于根据所述定位信息,从终端设备接收上行参考信号。In an optional implementation manner, the transceiver unit is configured to send a downlink broadcast channel, and the downlink broadcast channel includes configuration information of a downlink control channel; the transceiver unit is also configured to send the downlink control channel, The downlink control channel carries positioning information, and the positioning information includes information for configuring an uplink reference signal; the processing unit is configured to receive an uplink reference signal from a terminal device through the transceiver unit according to the positioning information. Alternatively, the transceiver unit is configured to send a downlink broadcast channel, and the downlink broadcast channel includes configuration information of a downlink control channel; the transceiver unit is also configured to send the downlink control channel, and the downlink control channel carries positioning information , the positioning information includes information for configuring an uplink reference signal; the transceiving unit is further configured to receive an uplink reference signal from a terminal device according to the positioning information.
在一种可选的实现方式中,所述通信装置还包括存储单元(有时也称为存储模块),所述处理单元用于与所述存储单元耦合,并执行所述存储单元中的程序或指令,使能所述通信装置执行上述第一方面至第六方面中的任意一方面所述的接入网设备的功能。In an optional implementation manner, the communication device further includes a storage unit (sometimes referred to as a storage module), and the processing unit is configured to be coupled with the storage unit and execute programs or An instruction to enable the communication device to perform the function of the access network device described in any one of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.
第九方面,提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序或指令,当其被运行时,使得上述各方面中终端设备或接入网设备所执行的方法被实现。In the ninth aspect, there is provided a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store computer programs or instructions, and when it is executed, the method performed by the terminal device or the access network device in the above-mentioned aspects be realized.
第十方面,提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当其在计算机上运行时,使得上述各方面所述的方法被实现。In a tenth aspect, a computer program product containing instructions is provided, which enables the methods described in the above aspects to be implemented when it is run on a computer.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1A为UE进行上行定位的流程图;FIG. 1A is a flow chart of UE performing uplink positioning;
图1B为LMF确定待定位目标的示意图;FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of determining the target to be positioned by the LMF;
图2为本申请实施例应用的网络架构的示意图;FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture applied in an embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的第一种通信方法的流程图;FIG. 3 is a flow chart of the first communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的第二种通信方法的流程图;FIG. 4 is a flowchart of a second communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请实施例中UE确定的上行参考信号所在的时隙的示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is determined by the UE in the embodiment of the present application;
图6为本申请实施例中UE确定的上行参考信号的起始符号的示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a start symbol of an uplink reference signal determined by a UE in an embodiment of the present application;
图7为本申请实施例中UE确定的上行参考信号所在的频域位置的示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of the frequency domain position where the uplink reference signal is determined by the UE in the embodiment of the present application;
图8为UE、基站以及AMF的协议栈示意图;FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of protocol stacks of UE, base station and AMF;
图9为本申请实施例中裁剪后的协议栈的示意图;Fig. 9 is a schematic diagram of the protocol stack after tailoring in the embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的第三种通信方法的流程图;FIG. 10 is a flowchart of a third communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图11为本申请实施例提供的第四种通信方法的流程图;FIG. 11 is a flowchart of a fourth communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图12为本申请实施例提供的一种装置的示意图;Fig. 12 is a schematic diagram of a device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图13为本申请实施例提供的又一种装置的示意图。Fig. 13 is a schematic diagram of another device provided by the embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
为了使本申请实施例的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚,下面将结合附图对本申请实施例作进一步地详细描述。In order to make the purpose, technical solutions, and advantages of the embodiments of the present application clearer, the embodiments of the present application will be further described in detail below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
以下,对本申请实施例中的部分用语或概念进行解释说明,以便于本领域技术人员理解。In the following, some terms or concepts in the embodiments of the present application are explained, so as to facilitate the understanding of those skilled in the art.
本申请实施例提供的方法和装置可应用于各种通信系统,例如,第五代(5th generation,5G),新无线(new radio,NR),长期演进(long term evolution,LTE),物联网(internet of things,IoT),无线保真(wireless-fidelity,WiFi),3GPP相关的无线通信,或未来可能出现的其他无线通信等。The method and device provided by the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, for example, the fifth generation (5th generation, 5G), new radio (new radio, NR), long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE), Internet of Things (internet of things, IoT), wireless fidelity (wireless-fidelity, WiFi), 3GPP related wireless communication, or other wireless communication that may appear in the future, etc.
本申请实施例中,终端设备是一种具有无线收发功能的设备,可以是固定设备,移动设备、手持设备(例如手机)、穿戴设备、车载设备,或内置于上述设备中的无线装置(例如,通信模块,调制解调器,或芯片系统等)。所述终端设备用于连接人,物,机器等,可广泛用于各种场景,例如包括但不限于以下场景:蜂窝通信、设备到设备通信(device-to-device,D2D)、车到一切(vehicle to everything,V2X)、机器到机器/机器类通信(machine-to-machine/machine-type communications,M2M/MTC)、物联网(internet of things,IoT)、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)、工业控制(industrial control)、无人驾驶(self driving)、远程医疗(remote medical)、智能电网(smart grid)、智能家具、智能办公、智能穿戴、智能交通,智慧城市(smart city)、无人机、机器人等场景的终端设备。所述终端设备有时可称为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、终端、接入站、UE站、远方站、无线通信设备、或用户装置等等。为描述方便,本申请实施例中将终端设备以UE为例进行说明。In the embodiment of this application, the terminal device is a device with wireless transceiver function, which can be a fixed device, a mobile device, a handheld device (such as a mobile phone), a wearable device, a vehicle-mounted device, or a wireless device built into the above-mentioned devices (such as , communication module, modem, or chip system, etc.). The terminal device is used to connect people, things, machines, etc., and can be widely used in various scenarios, including but not limited to the following scenarios: cellular communication, device-to-device communication (device-to-device, D2D), car-to-everything (vehicle to everything, V2X), machine-to-machine/machine-type communications (machine-to-machine/machine-type communications, M2M/MTC), Internet of things (Internet of things, IoT), virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) , augmented reality (augmented reality, AR), industrial control (industrial control), unmanned driving (self driving), telemedicine (remote medical), smart grid (smart grid), smart furniture, smart office, smart wear, smart transportation , Terminal equipment for smart cities, drones, robots and other scenarios. The terminal equipment may sometimes be referred to as user equipment (user equipment, UE), terminal, access station, UE station, remote station, wireless communication device, or user device, etc. For the convenience of description, in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device is taken as an example for description.
本申请实施例中的网络设备,例如可以包括接入网设备,和/或核心网设备。所述接入网设备为具有无线收发功能的设备,用于与所述终端设备进行通信。所述接入网设备包括但不限于基站(BTS,Node B,eNodeB/eNB,或gNodeB/gNB)、收发点(transmission reception point,TRP),第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)后续演进的基站,无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)系统中的接入节点,无线中继节点,无线回传节点等。所述基站可以是:宏基站,微基站,微微基站,小站,中继站等。多个基站可以支持同一种接入技术的网络,也可以支持不同接入技术的网络。基站可以包含一个或多个共站或非共站的传输接收点。所述接入网设备还可以是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network,CRAN)场景下的无线控制器、集中单元(centralized unit,CU),和/或分布单元(distributed unit,DU)。所述接入网设备还可以是服务器等。例如,车到一切(vehicle to everything,V2X)技术中的网络设备可以为路侧单元(road side unit,RSU)。以下对接入网设备以为基站为例进行说明。基站可以与终端设备进行通信,也可以通过中继站与终端设备进行通信。终端设备可以与不同接入技术中的多个基站进行通信。所述核心网设备用于实现移动管理,数据处理,会话管理,策略和计费等功能。不同接入技术的系统中实现核心网功能的设备名称可以不同,本申请实施例并不对此进行限定。以5G系统为例,所述核心网设备包括:接入和移动管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)、会话管理功能(session management function,SMF)、策略控制功能(policy control function,PCF)或用户面功能(user plane function,UPF)等。The network devices in this embodiment of the present application may include, for example, access network devices and/or core network devices. The access network device is a device with a wireless transceiver function, and is used for communicating with the terminal device. The access network equipment includes but is not limited to a base station (BTS, Node B, eNodeB/eNB, or gNodeB/gNB), a transmission reception point (TRP), a third generation partnership project (3rd generation partnership project, 3GPP ) Subsequent evolved base stations, access nodes in wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) systems, wireless relay nodes, wireless backhaul nodes, etc. The base station may be: a macro base station, a micro base station, a pico base station, a small station, a relay station, and the like. Multiple base stations can support networks of the same access technology or networks of different access technologies. A base station may contain one or more co-sited or non-co-sited transmission and reception points. The access network device may also be a wireless controller, a centralized unit (centralized unit, CU), and/or a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU) in a cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, CRAN) scenario. The access network device may also be a server or the like. For example, a network device in a vehicle to everything (V2X) technology may be a road side unit (RSU). In the following, the base station is used as an example for the access network device to be described. The base station can communicate with the terminal equipment, and can also communicate with the terminal equipment through the relay station. A terminal device can communicate with multiple base stations in different access technologies. The core network equipment is used to implement functions such as mobility management, data processing, session management, policy and charging. The names of devices implementing core network functions in systems with different access technologies may be different, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. Taking the 5G system as an example, the core network equipment includes: access and mobility management function (access and mobility management function, AMF), session management function (session management function, SMF), policy control function (policy control function, PCF) Or user plane function (user plane function, UPF), etc.
本申请实施例中,用于实现网络设备功能的通信装置可以是网络设备,也可以是能够支持网络设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片系统,该装置可以被安装在网络设备中。在本申请实施例提供的技术方案中,以用于实现网络设备的功能的装置是网络设备为例,描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。In the embodiment of the present application, the communication device for realizing the function of the network device may be a network device, or a device capable of supporting the network device to realize the function, such as a chip system, and the device may be installed in the network device. In the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application, the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application is described by taking the network device as an example for realizing the function of the network device.
本申请实施例中,对于名词的数目,除非特别说明,表示“单数名词或复数名词”,即"一个或多个”。“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。例如,A/B,表示:A或B。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a,b,或c中的至少一项(个),表示:a,b,c,a和b,a和c,b和c,或a和b和c,其中a,b,c可以是单个,也可以是多个。In the embodiments of the present application, for the number of nouns, unless otherwise specified, it means "singular noun or plural noun", that is, "one or more". "At least one" means one or more, and "plurality" means two or more. "And/or" describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there can be three types of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the contextual objects are an "or" relationship. For example, A/B means: A or B. "At least one of the following" or similar expressions refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single or plural items. For example, at least one item (piece) of a, b, or c means: a, b, c, a and b, a and c, b and c, or a and b and c, where a, b, c Can be single or multiple.
本申请实施例提及“第一”、“第二”等序数词是用于对多个对象进行区分,不用于限定多个对象的大小、内容、顺序、时序、优先级或者重要程度等。例如,第一序列和第二序列,可以是同一个序列,也可以是不同的序列,且,这种名称也并不是表示这两个序列的大小、内容、发送顺序、优先级或者重要程度等的不同。另外,本申请所介绍的各个实施例中对于步骤的编号,只是为了区分不同的步骤,并不用于限定步骤之间的先后顺序。例如,S301可以发生在S302之前,或者可能发生在S302之后,或者也可能与S302同时发生。The ordinal numerals such as "first" and "second" mentioned in this embodiment of the application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the size, content, order, timing, priority, or importance of multiple objects. For example, the first sequence and the second sequence can be the same sequence or different sequences, and this name does not indicate the size, content, sending order, priority or importance of the two sequences, etc. s difference. In addition, the numbering of the steps in the various embodiments introduced in this application is only for distinguishing different steps, and is not used to limit the order of the steps. For example, S301 may occur before S302, or may occur after S302, or may occur simultaneously with S302.
下面简单介绍本申请实施例涉及的技术特征。The following briefly introduces the technical features involved in the embodiments of the present application.
根据目前的协议流程,在UL-TDOA技术下,UE要进行定位,需要先接入网络,即,UE需要先进行小区搜索和随机接入,与基站建立RRC连接,之后才能发起定位请求。在发起定位请求后UE可从基站得到定位所需的信息,例如得到SRS配置信息,然后UE向基站发送定位参考信号,网络可对UE进行定位。可参考图1A,为UE进行上行定位的流程图,该流程是基于UL-TDOA技术。According to the current protocol process, under the UL-TDOA technology, UE needs to access the network first to perform positioning, that is, the UE needs to perform cell search and random access first, establish an RRC connection with the base station, and then initiate a positioning request. After initiating a positioning request, the UE can obtain information required for positioning from the base station, such as SRS configuration information, and then the UE sends a positioning reference signal to the base station, and the network can position the UE. Refer to FIG. 1A , which is a flow chart of performing uplink positioning for a UE, which is based on UL-TDOA technology.
S101、UE的服务基站发送同步信号和物理广播信道块(synchronization signal and PBCH block,SSB)。相应的,UE从服务基站接收SSB。S101. The serving base station of the UE sends a synchronization signal and a physical broadcast channel block (synchronization signal and PBCH block, SSB). Correspondingly, the UE receives the SSB from the serving base station.
该SSB可承载主信息块(master information block,MIB),从而UE可获得MIB,该MIB可承载物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH)的配置信息。The SSB can carry a master information block (master information block, MIB), so that the UE can obtain the MIB, and the MIB can carry configuration information of a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH).
S102、服务基站发送PDCCH。相应的,UE从服务基站接收PDCCH。S102. The serving base station sends a PDCCH. Correspondingly, the UE receives the PDCCH from the serving base station.
UE根据PDCCH的配置信息可检测PDCCH,该PDCCH可调度物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel,PDSCH),该PDSCH可承载系统信息块1(system information block,SIB1)。The UE can detect the PDCCH according to the configuration information of the PDCCH, and the PDCCH can schedule a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH), and the PDSCH can carry a system information block 1 (system information block, SIB1).
S103、服务基站发送PDSCH。相应的,UE从服务基站接收PDSCH。S103. The serving base station sends the PDSCH. Correspondingly, the UE receives the PDSCH from the serving base station.
UE根据PDCCH的调度可接收PDSCH,从而获得PDSCH承载的SIB1。该SIB1可配置UE发起随机接入所需要的随机接入资源,例如配置了随机接入前导(preamble)。UE在接收SIB1后,就可以发起随机接入。S101~S103可视为小区搜索过程,如下的S104~S107即为UE的随机接入过程。The UE can receive the PDSCH according to the scheduling of the PDCCH, so as to obtain the SIB1 carried by the PDSCH. The SIB1 may configure random access resources required by the UE to initiate random access, for example, a random access preamble (preamble) is configured. After receiving SIB1, UE can initiate random access. S101-S103 can be regarded as a cell search process, and the following S104-S107 is a random access process of the UE.
S104、UE向服务基站发送物理随机接入信道(physical random access channel,PRACH)。相应的,服务基站从UE接收PRACH。S104. The UE sends a physical random access channel (physical random access channel, PRACH) to the serving base station. Correspondingly, the serving base station receives the PRACH from the UE.
例如,UE根据SIB1的配置,通过PRACH向服务基站发送preamble,服务基站从UE接收preamble。该preamble也可称为随机接入过程中的第一消息(Msg1)。For example, according to the configuration of SIB1, the UE sends a preamble to the serving base station through the PRACH, and the serving base station receives the preamble from the UE. The preamble may also be called the first message (Msg1) in the random access process.
S105、服务基站向UE发送随机接入响应(random access response,RAR)。相应的,UE从服务基站接收RAR。该RAR也可称为随机接入过程中的第二消息(Msg2)。S105. The serving base station sends a random access response (random access response, RAR) to the UE. Correspondingly, the UE receives the RAR from the serving base station. The RAR can also be called the second message (Msg2) in the random access procedure.
S106、UE向服务基站发送RRC建立请求(RRC setup request)消息。相应的,服务基站从UE接收RRC建立请求消息。该RRC建立请求消息也可称为随机接入过程中的第三消息(Msg3)。S106. The UE sends an RRC setup request (RRC setup request) message to the serving base station. Correspondingly, the serving base station receives the RRC establishment request message from the UE. The RRC establishment request message may also be referred to as the third message (Msg3) in the random access procedure.
S107、服务基站向UE发送RRC建立响应(RRC setup response)消息。相应的,UE从服务基站接收RRC建立响应消息。该RRC建立响应消息也可称为随机接入过程中的第四消息(Msg4)。S107. The serving base station sends an RRC setup response (RRC setup response) message to the UE. Correspondingly, the UE receives an RRC establishment response message from the serving base station. The RRC setup response message may also be referred to as the fourth message (Msg4) in the random access procedure.
至此,UE的随机接入过程完成,如果随机接入成功,则UE与基站建立了RRC连接。接下来才开始执行对该UE的定位过程,即,如下的S108~S117为定位过程。So far, the random access process of the UE is completed, and if the random access is successful, the UE establishes an RRC connection with the base station. Next, the positioning process of the UE is started, that is, the following S108-S117 are the positioning process.
S108、UE向AMF发送用于请求定位的消息。相应的,AMF从UE接收用于请求定位的消息。S108. The UE sends a message for requesting positioning to the AMF. Correspondingly, the AMF receives a message for requesting positioning from the UE.
S109、AMF向LMF发送用于请求定位的消息。相应的,LMF从AMF接收用于请求定位的消息。S109. The AMF sends a message for requesting positioning to the LMF. Correspondingly, the LMF receives a message for requesting positioning from the AMF.
S110、LMF向服务基站发送定位信息请求消息。相应的,服务基站从LMF接收定位信息请求消息。定位信息请求消息用于请求获得SRS配置信息。S110. The LMF sends a location information request message to the serving base station. Correspondingly, the serving base station receives a location information request message from the LMF. The location information request message is used to request to obtain SRS configuration information.
S111、服务基站向LMF发送定位信息响应。相应的,LMF从服务基站接收定位信息响应。该定位信息响应可携带SRS配置信息。S111. The serving base station sends a positioning information response to the LMF. Correspondingly, the LMF receives a positioning information response from the serving base station. The positioning information response may carry SRS configuration information.
LMF接收SRS配置信息后,可将SRS配置信息发送给多个基站,这多个基站共同对该UE进行定位。After receiving the SRS configuration information, the LMF may send the SRS configuration information to multiple base stations, and the multiple base stations jointly locate the UE.
S112、服务基站将SRS配置信息发送给UE。相应的,UE从服务基站接收SRS配置信息。S112. The serving base station sends the SRS configuration information to the UE. Correspondingly, the UE receives SRS configuration information from the serving base station.
S113、LMF向多个基站发送测量请求。例如这多个基站包括服务基站,则相应的,服务基站从LMF接收测量请求。S113. The LMF sends measurement requests to multiple base stations. For example, the multiple base stations include the serving base station, and correspondingly, the serving base station receives the measurement request from the LMF.
S114、UE发送SRS。相应的,服务基站从UE接收SRS。S114. The UE sends the SRS. Correspondingly, the serving base station receives the SRS from the UE.
因为LMF将SRS配置信息发送给了多个基站,所以除了服务基站外这多个基站也可以从UE接收SRS。Since the LMF sends the SRS configuration information to multiple base stations, these multiple base stations can also receive the SRS from the UE in addition to the serving base station.
S115、服务基站向LMF发送测量结果。相应的,LMF从服务基站接收测量结果。S115. The serving base station sends the measurement result to the LMF. Correspondingly, the LMF receives the measurement result from the serving base station.
服务基站对来自UE的SRS进行测量,例如测量结果包括SRS的到达时间,服务基站可将测量结果发送给LMF。The serving base station measures the SRS from the UE, for example, the measurement result includes the arrival time of the SRS, and the serving base station may send the measurement result to the LMF.
因为LMF将SRS配置信息发送给了多个基站,所以除了服务基站外这多个基站也可以从UE接收SRS,这多个基站也可以对SRS进行测量,并将各自得到的测量结果发送给LMF,则LMF可得到多个测量结果。Because the LMF sends the SRS configuration information to multiple base stations, in addition to the serving base station, these multiple base stations can also receive SRS from the UE, and these multiple base stations can also measure the SRS, and send their respective measurement results to the LMF , then the LMF can obtain multiple measurement results.
S116、LMF估算UE的位置。LMF接收了来自多个基站的测量结果,则LMF可根据多个测量结果估算UE的位置。S116. The LMF estimates the location of the UE. After the LMF has received measurement results from multiple base stations, the LMF can estimate the location of the UE according to the multiple measurement results.
下面简单介绍LMF基于UL-TDOA的技术的测量结果如何计算得到待定位目标的位置,下面的介绍过程以3个基站参与定位为例,即,LMF向3个基站发送测量请求,也从这3个基站接收测量结果。这3个基站例如包括待定位目标的服务基站,这3个基站的位置是已知的。定义这3个基站中第i个基站的坐标为(x i,y i),i=1,2,3,定义待定位目标的坐标为(x UE,y UE)。例如将这3个基站中的第1个基站(即,i=1)作为参考基站,假设另外2个基站测量到的SRS的到达时间为t i,则另外2个基站中的任意一个基站测量的SRS到达时间与参考基站测量的SRS到达时间之间的时间差为Δt i1。根据双曲线的定义(与两 个固定的点的距离为常数),待定位目标位于以两个基站为焦点的双曲线上,则可以列出以下方程组: The following briefly introduces how the measurement results of LMF based on UL-TDOA technology calculate the position of the target to be located. A base station receives the measurement results. The three base stations include, for example, the serving base station of the target to be positioned, and the positions of the three base stations are known. Define the coordinates of the i-th base station among the three base stations as (x i , y i ), i=1, 2, 3, and define the coordinates of the target to be positioned as (x UE , y UE ). For example, taking the first base station (i.e., i=1) among the three base stations as a reference base station, assuming that the arrival time of the SRS measured by the other two base stations is t i , then any one of the other two base stations measures The time difference between the SRS arrival time measured by the reference base station and the SRS arrival time measured by the reference base station is Δt i1 . According to the definition of the hyperbola (the distance from two fixed points is constant), the target to be positioned is located on the hyperbola with the two base stations as the focus, then the following equations can be listed:
Figure PCTCN2022115217-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2022115217-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2022115217-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2022115217-appb-000002
公式1和公式2中,c表示光速,这两个公式中只有两个未知数(x UE和y UE),则联合公式1和公式2就可以解出这两个未知数,从而就能得到待定位UE的位置坐标。需注意的是,由于测量误差的存在,上述方程一般没有闭式解,在工程上会采用最小二乘算法或者粒子群滤波算法等经典的优化算法来估计上述方程的最优解。 In formula 1 and formula 2, c represents the speed of light, and there are only two unknowns (x UE and y UE ) in these two formulas, then these two unknowns can be solved by combining formula 1 and formula 2, so that the position to be positioned can be obtained The location coordinates of the UE. It should be noted that due to the existence of measurement errors, the above equations generally do not have a closed-form solution. In engineering, classic optimization algorithms such as least squares algorithm or particle swarm filter algorithm are used to estimate the optimal solution of the above equations.
可参考图1B,为LMF确定待定位目标的示意图。例如有3个基站参与定位,则以其中任意两个基站为基准均可确定一条双曲线,共可确定3条双曲线,这3条双曲线的交点就是待定位UE所在的位置。Refer to FIG. 1B , which is a schematic diagram of determining a target to be positioned for the LMF. For example, if there are 3 base stations participating in positioning, a hyperbola can be determined based on any two base stations, and a total of 3 hyperbolas can be determined, and the intersection point of these 3 hyperbolas is the location of the UE to be positioned.
根据上述介绍可知,目前UE需要在与基站建立RRC连接后才能被定位,即,一个UE如果要支持UL-TDOA定位技术,需要先完成小区搜索、随机接入等基本的通信流程,才能获得SRS配置信息。对于UE来说,如果既要支持3GPP的通信功能又要支持定位功能,则需要在UE内置入大量代码来支撑,而代码量增多,就需要在该UE内设置较大的存储空间来进行存储,而存储空间越大,则该UE的功耗也越高。可见,目前的定位过程不利于节省UE的功耗。According to the above introduction, at present, UE needs to establish an RRC connection with the base station before it can be positioned. That is, if a UE wants to support UL-TDOA positioning technology, it needs to complete basic communication procedures such as cell search and random access before obtaining SRS. configuration information. For the UE, if it needs to support both the 3GPP communication function and the positioning function, a large number of codes need to be built into the UE to support it, and when the amount of codes increases, a larger storage space needs to be set in the UE for storage. , and the larger the storage space, the higher the power consumption of the UE. It can be seen that the current positioning process is not conducive to saving the power consumption of the UE.
鉴于此,提供本申请实施例的技术方案。本申请实施例中,用于配置上行参考信号的定位信息可以包括在系统信息中,UE通过接收系统信息就能获得定位信息,而UE获得定位信息后就能向接入网设备发送上行参考信号,而无需完成随机接入,或者说,UE在无需进行随机接入的情况下就能向接入网设备发送上行参考信号,从而网络就能对该UE进行定位。通过本申请实施例提供的方案,减少了UE在被定位前原本需要执行的随机接入等通信流程,能够简化定位过程。而且由于减少了UE需要执行的通信流程,则无需在UE内部置入随机接入相关的代码,由此能够减小UE的存储空间,从而节省UE的功耗。另外,包括了定位信息的系统信息为第一类型,例如第一类型的系统信息可以不包括传统的系统信息所包括的小区的公共配置信息等内容,而只是包括定位相关的信息(例如定位信息),这样可以减小第一类型的系统信息的容量,节省传输开销,也降低了UE的代码复杂度,进而节省了UE的存储空间,最终UE以较低的功耗能够实现定位,延长了UE的使用寿命。In view of this, the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application are provided. In the embodiment of the present application, the positioning information used to configure the uplink reference signal may be included in the system information, the UE can obtain the positioning information by receiving the system information, and the UE can send the uplink reference signal to the access network device after obtaining the positioning information , without completing random access, or in other words, the UE can send an uplink reference signal to the access network device without performing random access, so that the network can locate the UE. Through the solution provided by the embodiment of the present application, the communication procedures such as random access that the UE originally needs to perform before being positioned are reduced, and the positioning process can be simplified. Moreover, since the communication process that the UE needs to execute is reduced, there is no need to insert random access-related codes inside the UE, thereby reducing the storage space of the UE, thereby saving the power consumption of the UE. In addition, the system information including positioning information is the first type. For example, the first type of system information may not include the public configuration information of the cell included in the traditional system information, but only includes positioning-related information (such as positioning information ), which can reduce the capacity of the first type of system information, save transmission overhead, and also reduce the code complexity of the UE, thereby saving the storage space of the UE. Finally, the UE can achieve positioning with lower power consumption, extending the UE lifetime.
请参考图2,为本申请实施例所应用的一种网络架构的示意图。图2包括核心网设备、接入网设备和UE。接入网设备与核心网设备可联合实现对该UE的定位。核心网设备例如包括位置服务器和AMF。其中,在不同的通信系统(例如4G系统或5G系统)中,位置服务器可能不同,例如位置服务器包括LMF、增强移动服务定位中心(enhanced serving mobile location centre,E-SMLC)或安全用户平面定位平台(SUPL location platform,SLP)。图2中,以位置服务器包括LMF为例,E-SMLC和SLP都用虚线表示,以示为与LMF并列的几种可选项。位置服务器(例如E-SMLC、SLP或LMF)可以用于从一个或多个定位单元(例如接入网设备)获取测量结果,还可能获取其他与位置相关的信息,以及,可以向定位单元提供辅助数据,以帮助确定目标设备的位置。图2中的接入网设备例如包括接 入网设备1和接入网设备2等。UE与接入网设备之间通过Uu接口连接,接入网设备与AMF之间通过下一代(next generation,NG)-C接口连接,接入网设备之间通过Xn接口连接,LMF与AMF之间通过NLs接口连接。Please refer to FIG. 2 , which is a schematic diagram of a network architecture applied in the embodiment of the present application. Figure 2 includes core network equipment, access network equipment and UE. The access network device and the core network device can jointly realize the positioning of the UE. The core network equipment includes, for example, a location server and an AMF. Among them, in different communication systems (such as 4G system or 5G system), the location server may be different, for example, the location server includes LMF, enhanced serving mobile location center (enhanced serving mobile location center, E-SMLC) or secure user plane location platform (SUPL location platform, SLP). In Fig. 2, taking the location server including LMF as an example, both E-SMLC and SLP are indicated by dotted lines to show several options parallel to LMF. The location server (such as E-SMLC, SLP or LMF) can be used to obtain measurement results from one or more positioning units (such as access network equipment), and may also obtain other location-related information, and can provide positioning units Assistance data to help determine the location of the target device. The access network devices in Fig. 2 include, for example, access network device 1, access network device 2, and so on. The UE is connected to the access network device through the Uu interface, the access network device and the AMF are connected through the next generation (NG)-C interface, the access network devices are connected through the Xn interface, and the LMF and AMF They are connected through NLs interface.
图2中,LMF是一种部署在核心网中为UE提供定位功能的装置或组件。图2中的接入网设备例如为基站。其中,接入网设备在不同的系统对应不同的设备,例如在4G系统中可以对应eNB,在5G系统中对应5G中的接入网设备,例如gNB。当然本申请实施例所提供的技术方案也可以应用于未来的移动通信系统中,因此图2中的接入网设备也可以对应未来的移动通信系统中的网络设备。本申请实施例以接入网设备是基站为例,实际上参考前文的介绍,接入网设备还可以是RSU等设备。图2中的接入网设备1和接入网设备2可以是同种类型的设备,例如均为eNB;或者,图2中的接入网设备1和接入网设备2也可以是不同类型的设备,例如接入网设备1为eNB,接入网设备2为gNB。In Fig. 2, the LMF is a device or component deployed in the core network to provide the positioning function for the UE. The access network device in FIG. 2 is, for example, a base station. Wherein, the access network device corresponds to different devices in different systems, for example, in the 4G system, it may correspond to eNB, and in the 5G system, it may correspond to the access network device in 5G, such as gNB. Of course, the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to future mobile communication systems, so the access network equipment in FIG. 2 can also correspond to network equipment in future mobile communication systems. The embodiment of the present application takes the access network device as a base station as an example. In fact, referring to the foregoing introduction, the access network device may also be a device such as an RSU. Access network device 1 and access network device 2 in FIG. 2 may be of the same type, for example, both are eNBs; or, access network device 1 and access network device 2 in FIG. 2 may also be of different types For example, the access network device 1 is an eNB, and the access network device 2 is a gNB.
下面结合附图介绍本申请实施例提供的技术方案。需要注意的是,在本申请的各个实施例对应的附图中,凡是用虚线表示的步骤均为可选的步骤。在本申请的各个实施例中,“上行参考信号”、“上行定位参考信号”、“定位参考信号”等术语表征的是同一特征,即,代表用于定位的上行参考信号,在后文中不再进行明确区分。如果上行参考信号为SRS,则“SRS信号”、“定位SRS信号”、“SRS”等术语表征的也是同一特征,即,代表用于定位的SRS。The following describes the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application with reference to the accompanying drawings. It should be noted that, in the drawings corresponding to the various embodiments of the present application, all steps indicated by dotted lines are optional steps. In various embodiments of the present application, terms such as "uplink reference signal", "uplink positioning reference signal" and "positioning reference signal" represent the same feature, that is, they represent the uplink reference signal used for positioning, which will not be described in the following Then make a clear distinction. If the uplink reference signal is an SRS, terms such as "SRS signal", "positioning SRS signal", and "SRS" also represent the same feature, that is, they represent SRS for positioning.
本申请的各个实施例涉及UE、接入网设备、核心网设备以及定位服务器等装置。其中,定位服务器也可以称为定位设备、位置服务器、定位服务中心或定位处理中心等,总之定位服务器能够根据接入网设备的测量结果确定UE的位置,对于其名称不做限制。在下文的介绍过程中,均以所提供的方法应用于图2所示的网络架构为例。下文的各个实施例所述的UE例如为图2所示的网络架构中的UE,下文的各个实施例所述的接入网设备例如为图2所示的网络架构中的接入网设备1或接入网设备2,下文的各个实施例所述的核心网设备例如为图2所示的网络架构中的AMF,下文的各个实施例所述的定位服务器例如为图2所示的网络架构中的LMF、E-SMLC或SLP。为了简化描述,在本申请的各个实施例中,以核心网设备是AMF、定位服务器是LMF为例。Various embodiments of the present application relate to devices such as UE, access network equipment, core network equipment, and positioning server. The positioning server can also be called a positioning device, a location server, a positioning service center, or a positioning processing center. In short, the positioning server can determine the position of the UE according to the measurement results of the access network equipment, and there is no restriction on its name. In the following introduction process, the provided method is applied to the network architecture shown in FIG. 2 as an example. The UE described in the following embodiments is, for example, the UE in the network architecture shown in FIG. 2 , and the access network device described in the following embodiments is, for example, the access network device 1 in the network architecture shown in FIG. 2 Or the access network device 2, the core network device described in the various embodiments below is, for example, the AMF in the network architecture shown in Figure 2, and the positioning server described in the various embodiments below is, for example, the network architecture shown in Figure 2 LMF, E-SMLC or SLP in. In order to simplify the description, in each embodiment of the present application, it is assumed that the core network device is the AMF and the location server is the LMF as an example.
本申请实施例提供第一种通信方法,请参见图3,为该方法的流程图。The embodiment of the present application provides a first communication method, please refer to FIG. 3 , which is a flow chart of the method.
S301、接入网设备发送下行控制信道。相应的,UE从接入网设备接收下行控制信道。S301. The access network device sends a downlink control channel. Correspondingly, the UE receives the downlink control channel from the access network device.
该下行控制信道可用于调度系统信息,可理解为,该下行控制信道可调度PDSCH,该PDSCH可承载系统信息。该下行控制信道例如为PDCCH。其中,该PDCCH承载下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI),该PDCCH调度PDSCH,具体可以是,该DCI调度PDSCH。The downlink control channel can be used to schedule system information, and it can be understood that the downlink control channel can schedule a PDSCH, and the PDSCH can carry system information. The downlink control channel is, for example, PDCCH. The PDCCH carries downlink control information (DCI), and the PDCCH schedules the PDSCH. Specifically, the DCI schedules the PDSCH.
该PDCCH可指示所调度的系统信息的类型,例如指示该系统信息的类型为第一类型或第二类型,例如除了第一类型之外的类型均属于第二类型。第一类型的系统信息例如包括定位信息,而第二类型的系统信息不包括定位信息。定位信息可用于定位,例如定位信息包括用于配置上行参考信号的信息,而上行参考信号可用于定位。可选的,第一类型例如为定位专用类型,第二类型例如为非定位专用类型。The PDCCH may indicate the type of the scheduled system information, for example, indicate that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type, for example, all types except the first type belong to the second type. The first type of system information includes, for example, positioning information, while the second type of system information does not include positioning information. The positioning information can be used for positioning, for example, the positioning information includes information for configuring an uplink reference signal, and the uplink reference signal can be used for positioning. Optionally, the first type is, for example, a positioning-specific type, and the second type is, for example, a non-positioning-specific type.
该PDCCH指示系统信息的类型,可以有不同的指示方式。例如一种指示方式为,该PDCCH承载的DCI可包括指示信息,该指示信息可指示系统信息的类型为第一类型或第二类型。可选的,可通过该DCI中的预留(reserved)比特来承载指示信息,从而指示系 统信息的类型。例如,目前利用系统信息无线网络临时标识(system information radio network tempory identity,SI-RNTI)加扰的DCI中仍然有15比特至17比特的预留空间,则该指示信息可占用其中的一个或多个比特。例如该指示信息占用1个比特,如果该比特的取值为“1”,表示系统信息的类型为第一类型;如果该比特的取值为“0”,表示系统信息的类型为第二类型。UE根据DCI包括的指示信息就可确定系统信息的类型。The PDCCH indicates the type of system information, and there may be different indication manners. For example, an indication manner is that the DCI carried by the PDCCH may include indication information, and the indication information may indicate that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type. Optionally, reserved (reserved) bits in the DCI may be used to carry indication information, thereby indicating the type of system information. For example, there is still a reserved space of 15 bits to 17 bits in the DCI scrambled by the system information radio network temporary identity (SI-RNTI) at present, and the indication information can occupy one or more of them. bits. For example, the indication information occupies 1 bit. If the value of this bit is "1", it means that the type of system information is the first type; if the value of this bit is "0", it means that the type of system information is the second type. . The UE can determine the type of system information according to the indication information included in the DCI.
又例如,另一种指示方式为,可通过加扰序列来指示。例如,如果PDCCH(或者说,DCI)的加扰序列为第一序列,则指示系统信息的类型为第一类型;如果PDCCH(或者说,DCI)的加扰序列为第二序列,则指示系统信息的类型为第二类型。第一序列例如为新定义的加扰序列,例如称为定位(POS)-SI-RNTI,第二序列例如为SI-RNTI。UE根据用于加扰PDCCH的加扰序列,就能确定系统信息的类型。For another example, another indication manner may be indicated by using a scrambling sequence. For example, if the scrambling sequence of the PDCCH (or DCI) is the first sequence, it indicates that the type of system information is the first type; if the scrambling sequence of the PDCCH (or DCI) is the second sequence, it indicates that the system The type of information is the second type. The first sequence is, for example, a newly defined scrambling sequence, for example called positioning (POS)-SI-RNTI, and the second sequence is, for example, SI-RNTI. The UE can determine the type of system information according to the scrambling sequence used to scramble the PDCCH.
S302、接入网设备发送系统信息。相应的,如果下行控制信道指示系统信息的类型为第一类型,UE检测系统信息。S302. The access network device sends system information. Correspondingly, if the type of the system information indicated by the downlink control channel is the first type, the UE detects the system information.
接入网设备在发送PDCCH后,会发送PDSCH。如果PDCCH指示系统信息的类型为第一类型,则UE可根据PDCCH的调度来检测该PDSCH,该PDSCH可承载系统信息,此时,该PDSCH承载的是第一类型的系统信息。而如果PDCCH指示系统信息的类型为第二类型,则UE可以不必检测PDSCH,由此可以节省UE的功耗。上述UE例如为需要定位的UE,或者是需要定位且对功耗和/或时延要求较高的UE,或者是需要定位且对通信要求不高的UE;而除此之外,如果是普通UE,例如无需定位的UE,或者是虽然需要定位但是对功耗和/或时延等要求不高的UE,或者是对通信有要求的UE,则此类UE的响应方式与上述UE相反,例如,如果PDCCH指示系统信息的类型为第一类型,则此类UE不必检测PDSCH,而如果PDCCH指示系统信息的类型为第二类型,则此类UE可根据PDCCH的调度检测PDSCH,以接收第二类型的系统信息,从而进一步进行随机接入等过程。本申请实施例主要介绍第一类型的系统信息相关的内容。After sending the PDCCH, the access network device will send the PDSCH. If the type of system information indicated by the PDCCH is the first type, the UE may detect the PDSCH according to the scheduling of the PDCCH, and the PDSCH may carry the system information. At this time, the PDSCH carries the system information of the first type. However, if the type of system information indicated by the PDCCH is the second type, the UE does not need to detect the PDSCH, thereby saving power consumption of the UE. The above-mentioned UEs are, for example, UEs that need positioning, or UEs that need positioning and have high requirements for power consumption and/or delay, or UEs that need positioning and do not have high requirements for communication; UEs, such as UEs that do not require positioning, or UEs that require positioning but do not require high power consumption and/or delay, or UEs that require communication, the response mode of such UEs is opposite to that of the above-mentioned UEs, For example, if the PDCCH indicates that the type of system information is the first type, such UEs do not need to detect the PDSCH, and if the PDCCH indicates that the type of system information is the second type, then such UEs can detect the PDSCH according to the scheduling of the PDCCH to receive the second Two types of system information, so as to further perform processes such as random access. The embodiment of the present application mainly introduces the content related to the first type of system information.
第一类型的系统信息可包括定位信息,定位信息可包括用于配置上行参考信号的信息,例如将用于配置上行参考信号的信息称为第一配置信息。例如,定位信息仅包括第一配置信息,此时定位信息和第一配置信息可以是同一概念;或者,定位信息除了包括第一配置信息外还包括其他的用于实现定位功能的信息。第一配置信息例如包括如下一项或多项:上行参考信号的带宽信息,上行参考信号的周期,上行参考信号在时域上占用的符号个数,上行参考信号在频域上的梳齿(comb)类型,上行参考信号的频域起始位置信息,上行参考信号所在的时隙(slot)的编号,或,上行参考信号的时域起始位置信息。或者,第一配置信息还可能包括用于配置上行参考信号的其他信息。定位信息例如包括在该系统信息的信息单元(information element,IE)中。例如定位信息包括在该系统信息内已有的IE中,或者也可以在该系统信息中新增IE来承载定位信息。The first type of system information may include positioning information, and the positioning information may include information for configuring uplink reference signals, for example, the information for configuring uplink reference signals is referred to as first configuration information. For example, the positioning information only includes the first configuration information, and at this time the positioning information and the first configuration information may be the same concept; or, the positioning information includes other information for realizing the positioning function in addition to the first configuration information. The first configuration information includes, for example, one or more of the following items: bandwidth information of the uplink reference signal, period of the uplink reference signal, number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal in the time domain, comb teeth of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain ( comb) type, the frequency-domain start position information of the uplink reference signal, the number of the time slot (slot) where the uplink reference signal is located, or the time-domain start position information of the uplink reference signal. Alternatively, the first configuration information may also include other information for configuring the uplink reference signal. The positioning information is, for example, included in an information element (information element, IE) of the system information. For example, the positioning information is included in the existing IE in the system information, or an IE may be newly added in the system information to bear the positioning information.
可选的,第一类型的系统信息还可以包括信道配置信息,该信道配置信息可用于配置上行信道。例如,信道配置信息可包括在定位信息中,例如信道配置信息包括在第一配置信息中,或者信道配置信息包括在定位信息中但是不包括在第一配置信息中;又例如,信道配置信息不包括在定位信息中,但是包括在第一类型的系统信息中,即,第一类型的系统信息除了包括定位信息外,还包括信道配置信息。该上行信道例如包括上行控制信道和/或上行共享信道。如果信道配置信息不包括在定位信息中,则信道配置信息与定位信息可以包括在该系统信息内的一个IE中,或者也可以包括在该系统信息内的不同的IE中。Optionally, the first type of system information may also include channel configuration information, and the channel configuration information may be used to configure an uplink channel. For example, the channel configuration information may be included in the positioning information, for example, the channel configuration information is included in the first configuration information, or the channel configuration information is included in the positioning information but not included in the first configuration information; Included in the positioning information, but included in the first type of system information, that is, the first type of system information also includes channel configuration information in addition to the positioning information. The uplink channel includes, for example, an uplink control channel and/or an uplink shared channel. If the channel configuration information is not included in the positioning information, the channel configuration information and the positioning information may be included in one IE in the system information, or may be included in different IEs in the system information.
可选的,第一类型的系统信息除了包括定位信息外(或者,除了包括定位信息和信道配置信息外),还可能包括其他信息。例如,第一类型的系统信息还包括小区选择信息,和/或,包括统一接入控制(unifiied access control,UAC)信息。其中,小区选择信息可用于配置判断某个小区是否适合用于小区选择的参数(例如,小区选择信息包括接入该小区需满足的最小信号质量等级),该小区例如包括发送第一类型的系统信息的小区;UAC信息例如包括UAC限制信息(uac-BarringInfo),用于限制网络接入。例如,该系统信息为SIB1,或者也可能是除了SIB1和MIB外的其他系统信息。Optionally, the first type of system information may include other information in addition to positioning information (or, in addition to positioning information and channel configuration information). For example, the first type of system information also includes cell selection information, and/or, includes unified access control (unifiied access control, UAC) information. Among them, the cell selection information can be used to configure parameters for judging whether a certain cell is suitable for cell selection (for example, the cell selection information includes the minimum signal quality level required to access the cell), and the cell includes, for example, a system that transmits the first type The cell of the information; the UAC information includes, for example, UAC barring information (uac-BarringInfo), which is used to restrict network access. For example, the system information is SIB1, or it may be other system information except SIB1 and MIB.
以该系统信息是SIB1为例,定位信息例如包括在SIB1已有的公共上行部分带宽(BWP-UplinkCommon)中,或者定位信息也可以包括在SIB1内已有的其他IE中,或者也可以在SIB1中新增IE来承载定位信息。Taking the system information as SIB1 as an example, the positioning information is included in the existing common uplink bandwidth (BWP-UplinkCommon) of SIB1, or the positioning information can also be included in other existing IEs in SIB1, or it can also be included in SIB1 A new IE is added to carry location information.
S303、UE根据定位信息,向接入网设备发送上行参考信号。相应的,如果接入网设备指示系统信息的类型为第一类型,则接入网设备从UE接收上行参考信号。S303. The UE sends an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information. Correspondingly, if the access network device indicates that the type of system information is the first type, the access network device receives the uplink reference signal from the UE.
UE通过第一类型的系统信息已经获得了定位信息,则UE根据定位信息就可以向接入网设备发送上行参考信号,该上行参考信号可用于定位,例如用于对该UE进行定位。接入网设备接收该上行参考信号后,可对该上行参考信号进行测量,并将测量结果发送给LMF,从而LMF可根据测量结果对该UE进行定位。也就是说,UE通过第一类型的系统信息就获得了定位信息,从而UE无需进行随机接入就能实现定位,减少了UE在被定位前原本需要执行的随机接入等通信流程,能够简化定位过程。而且由于减少了终端设备需要执行的通信流程,则无需在终端设备内部植入与定位功能无关的代码(例如随机接入相关的代码等),由此能够减小终端设备的存储空间,从而节省终端设备的功耗。另外,对于某些场景,例如资产盘点、物流跟踪、电子围栏等场景,对于定位的功耗有较高的需求,例如需维持6到18个月的使用寿命,而这些场景对通信的需求远远小于对定位的需求。因此如果将本申请实施例的技术方案应用于这些场景,则UE由于无需执行随机接入等通信流程,可以有助于维持较长的使用寿命。另外,包括了定位信息的系统信息为第一类型,第一类型的系统信息例如为定位专用的系统信息,例如第一类型的系统信息可以不包括传统的系统信息所包括的小区的公共配置信息等内容,而只是包括定位相关的信息(例如定位信息),这样可以减小第一类型的系统信息的容量,节省传输开销,也降低了终端设备的代码复杂度,进而节省了终端设备的存储空间,最终终端设备以较低的功耗能够实现定位,延长了终端设备的使用寿命。After the UE has obtained the positioning information through the first type of system information, the UE can send an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information, and the uplink reference signal can be used for positioning, for example, for positioning the UE. After receiving the uplink reference signal, the access network device can measure the uplink reference signal and send the measurement result to the LMF, so that the LMF can locate the UE according to the measurement result. That is to say, the UE obtains the positioning information through the first type of system information, so that the UE can achieve positioning without performing random access, which reduces the communication procedures such as random access that the UE originally needs to perform before being positioned, and can simplify positioning process. Moreover, since the communication process that the terminal device needs to execute is reduced, there is no need to implant codes that have nothing to do with the positioning function (such as codes related to random access, etc.) inside the terminal device, thereby reducing the storage space of the terminal device and saving Power consumption of end equipment. In addition, for some scenarios, such as asset inventory, logistics tracking, electronic fence and other scenarios, there is a high demand for positioning power consumption, for example, the service life of 6 to 18 months needs to be maintained, and these scenarios require far more communication. Far less than the need for positioning. Therefore, if the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application are applied to these scenarios, since the UE does not need to perform communication procedures such as random access, it can help maintain a longer service life. In addition, the system information including positioning information is of the first type. The first type of system information is, for example, positioning-specific system information. For example, the first type of system information may not include public configuration information of cells included in traditional system information. and other content, but only includes positioning-related information (such as positioning information), which can reduce the capacity of the first type of system information, save transmission overhead, and also reduce the code complexity of the terminal device, thereby saving the storage of the terminal device Space, the final terminal equipment can achieve positioning with low power consumption, prolonging the service life of the terminal equipment.
为了更好地理解本申请实施例的技术方案,下面介绍本申请实施例提供的第二种通信方法,该方法可看做是图3所示的实施例的一种可选的实施方式。请参考图4,为该方法的流程图。In order to better understand the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application, the second communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application is introduced below, which can be regarded as an optional implementation manner of the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 . Please refer to FIG. 4 , which is a flowchart of the method.
S401、接入网设备发送物理广播信道(physical broadcast channel,PBCH)。相应的,UE从接入网设备接收PBCH。接入网设备例如在某个小区发送PBCH,因此该小区内可能有多个UE都能接收该PBCH,本申请实施例以所述UE为例。该接入网设备例如为该UE的服务基站。例如,接入网设备发送的是SSB,SSB承载在PBCH上。S401. The access network device sends a physical broadcast channel (physical broadcast channel, PBCH). Correspondingly, the UE receives the PBCH from the access network device. The access network equipment, for example, transmits the PBCH in a certain cell, so there may be multiple UEs in the cell that can receive the PBCH, and the embodiments of the present application take the UE as an example. The access network device is, for example, a serving base station of the UE. For example, the access network device sends the SSB, and the SSB is carried on the PBCH.
PBCH可承载MIB,MIB可包括当前小区的一些公共配置信息,例如MIB可配置系统帧号(system frame number,SFN),还可包括PDCCH的配置信息等。另外,UE通过接收PBCH,可以获得与当前小区的下行时间同步。The PBCH can carry the MIB, and the MIB can include some public configuration information of the current cell, for example, the MIB can configure a system frame number (system frame number, SFN), and can also include PDCCH configuration information, etc. In addition, the UE can obtain downlink time synchronization with the current cell by receiving the PBCH.
S402、接入网设备发送下行控制信道。相应的,UE从接入网设备接收下行控制信道。 该下行控制信道例如为PDCCH。或者理解为,接入网设备通过PDCCH发送下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI),相应的,UE通过PDCCH从接入网设备接收DCI。S402. The access network device sends a downlink control channel. Correspondingly, the UE receives the downlink control channel from the access network device. The downlink control channel is, for example, PDCCH. Alternatively, the access network device sends downlink control information (DCI) through the PDCCH, and correspondingly, the UE receives the DCI from the access network device through the PDCCH.
MIB包括PDCCH的配置信息,PDCCH的配置信息例如包括PDCCH的时域信息和/或频域信息等,UE根据PDCCH的配置信息就可以检测PDCCH。该PDCCH可用于调度系统信息,可理解为,该PDCCH可调度PDSCH,该PDSCH可承载系统信息。或者说,该PDCCH承载DCI,DCI可调度PDSCH,该PDSCH可承载系统信息。The MIB includes configuration information of the PDCCH. The configuration information of the PDCCH includes, for example, time domain information and/or frequency domain information of the PDCCH. The UE can detect the PDCCH according to the configuration information of the PDCCH. The PDCCH can be used to schedule system information, and it can be understood that the PDCCH can schedule a PDSCH, and the PDSCH can carry system information. In other words, the PDCCH carries DCI, the DCI can schedule the PDSCH, and the PDSCH can carry system information.
该PDCCH可指示所调度的系统信息的类型,例如指示该系统信息的类型为第一类型或第二类型,除了第一类型之外的类型均属于第二类型。The PDCCH may indicate the type of the scheduled system information, for example, indicate that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type, and all types except the first type belong to the second type.
或者,UE也可能不根据MIB来检测PDCCH,而是通过其他方式检测PDCCH,因此S401是可选的步骤。Alternatively, the UE may not detect the PDCCH according to the MIB, but detects the PDCCH in other ways, so S401 is an optional step.
S402与图3所示的S301可以是同一步骤,因此关于S402的更多内容,可参考S301。S402 may be the same step as S301 shown in FIG. 3 , so for more content about S402, refer to S301.
S403、接入网设备发送系统信息。相应的,如果PDCCH指示系统信息的类型为第一类型,UE检测系统信息。S403. The access network device sends system information. Correspondingly, if the type of system information indicated by the PDCCH is the first type, the UE detects the system information.
S403与图3所示的S302可以是同一步骤,因此关于S403的更多内容,可参考S302。S403 may be the same step as S302 shown in FIG. 3 , so for more content about S403 , refer to S302 .
S404、UE向接入网设备发送该UE的标识。相应的,接入网设备从UE接收该UE的标识。S404. The UE sends the identifier of the UE to the access network device. Correspondingly, the access network device receives the identifier of the UE from the UE.
本申请实施例中UE并不进行随机接入,如果UE直接请求定位或者直接发送上行参考信号,可能网络无法识别UE的身份。因此UE可以将该UE的标识发送给接入网设备,使得网络能够明确UE的身份,从而对该UE进行定位。UE的标识例如为UE的身份号(ID),UE ID例如为序列号,该序列号用于唯一标识该UE。UE的标识可以是在UE出厂时配置好,固化在UE的芯片内部,或者也可以是由其他设备为UE分配的编号,例如是接入网设备或核心网设备为UE分配的编号。总之,UE的标识与UE相关联。In the embodiment of the present application, the UE does not perform random access. If the UE directly requests positioning or directly sends an uplink reference signal, the network may not be able to identify the identity of the UE. Therefore, the UE can send the identity of the UE to the access network device, so that the network can clarify the identity of the UE, so as to locate the UE. The identifier of the UE is, for example, an identity number (ID) of the UE, and the UE ID is, for example, a serial number, which is used to uniquely identify the UE. The UE ID can be configured when the UE leaves the factory and fixed inside the UE's chip, or it can also be a number assigned to the UE by other devices, such as the number assigned to the UE by access network equipment or core network equipment. In summary, an identity of a UE is associated with the UE.
UE可在第一类型的系统信息配置的上行信道上向接入网设备发送UE的标识,该上行信道例如包括上行控制信道和/或上行共享信道,下面举例介绍UE通过不同的上行信道发送UE的标识的方式。The UE can send the UE's identity to the access network device on the uplink channel configured by the first type of system information. The uplink channel includes, for example, the uplink control channel and/or the uplink shared channel. The following example introduces the UE sending the UE through different uplink channels. way of identification.
作为一种可选的实施方式,该上行信道包括上行控制信道。可选的,该上行控制信道还可用于请求定位,也就是说,该上行控制信道除了承载UE的标识外,还可用于请求定位。则接入网设备接收该上行控制信道后,就能明确该UE要请求定位。该上行控制信道例如为物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH),或者也可以是其他类型的上行控制信道,本申请实施例以PUCCH为例。以第一类型的系统信息是SIB1为例,SIB1可配置公共PUCCH(pucch-ConfigCommon),该公共PUCCH就可作为所述上行控制信道,UE在无需得到调度的情况下可以使用SIB1所配置的公共PUCCH向接入网设备发送信息。本申请实施例中,UE可利用SIB1配置的公共PUCCH向接入网设备发送该UE的标识。As an optional implementation manner, the uplink channel includes an uplink control channel. Optionally, the uplink control channel can also be used to request positioning, that is to say, the uplink control channel can also be used to request positioning in addition to carrying the identity of the UE. Then, after receiving the uplink control channel, the access network device can make it clear that the UE wants to request positioning. The uplink control channel is, for example, a physical uplink control channel (physical uplink control channel, PUCCH), or may also be another type of uplink control channel, and the embodiment of the present application uses PUCCH as an example. Taking the first type of system information as SIB1 as an example, SIB1 can be configured with a common PUCCH (pucch-ConfigCommon), and the common PUCCH can be used as the uplink control channel, and the UE can use the common PUCCH configured by SIB1 without being scheduled. PUCCH sends information to access network equipment. In this embodiment of the present application, the UE may use the public PUCCH configured by SIB1 to send the identity of the UE to the access network device.
在初始接入时,目前只支持PUCCH格式(format)0和PUCCH format 1这两种格式,也就是说,SIB1所配置的公共PUCCH的格式一般是PUCCH format 0或PUCCH format 1。而这两种格式的PUCCH最多只能携带2比特(bit)的信息,如果通过这种PUCCH承载UE的标识,可能承载空间不足。可选的,本申请实施例提出,可以令SIB1配置第一格式的PUCCH,第一格式例如为PUCCH format 2、PUCCH format 3或PUCCH format 4,或者,第一格式还可以是新定义的PUCCH,例如称为PUCCH format 5,或者还可以有其他名称。 例如,SIB1可以只配置第一格式的PUCCH,而不配置传统的PUCCH format 0或PUCCH format 1,或者,SIB1除了配置第一格式的PUCCH之外,还可以配置传统的PUCCH format0或PUCCH format 1,只是本申请实施例的UE可能并不使用传统的PUCCH format 0或PUCCH format 1。UE在向接入网设备发送该UE的标识时,可通过SIB1配置的第一格式的PUCCH来发送,第一格式的PUCCH可携带更多的信息比特,因此可以用来承载UE的标识。另外,可能只是需要定位的UE会通过SIB1配置的PUCCH向接入网设备发送UE的标识,而对于普通UE(例如不需要定位的UE,或者虽然需要定位但是对定位的时延或功耗等要求不高的UE)来说,可能还是会按照正常流程进行随机接入,因此,第一格式的PUCCH还可以实现一种功能,即,第一格式的PUCCH可用于请求定位,接入网设备根据第一格式的PUCCH就能明确有UE请求定位,再根据UE的标识就能确定请求定位的UE的身份。At the time of initial access, only two formats of PUCCH format (format) 0 and PUCCH format 1 are currently supported, that is to say, the format of the public PUCCH configured by SIB1 is generally PUCCH format 0 or PUCCH format 1. However, the PUCCHs of these two formats can only carry 2 bits of information at most, and if such PUCCHs are used to carry the UE's identity, there may be insufficient carrying space. Optionally, this embodiment proposes that SIB1 can be configured with a PUCCH in a first format, such as PUCCH format 2, PUCCH format 3 or PUCCH format 4, or the first format can also be a newly defined PUCCH, For example, it is called PUCCH format 5, or it can have other names. For example, SIB1 can only configure PUCCH in the first format, without configuring traditional PUCCH format 0 or PUCCH format 1, or, in addition to configuring PUCCH in the first format, SIB1 can also configure traditional PUCCH format0 or PUCCH format 1, It's just that the UE in this embodiment of the application may not use traditional PUCCH format 0 or PUCCH format 1. When the UE sends the UE's identity to the access network device, it can send it through the PUCCH of the first format configured by SIB1. The PUCCH of the first format can carry more information bits, so it can be used to carry the UE's identity. In addition, it may be that only the UE that needs positioning will send the UE identity to the access network device through the PUCCH configured by SIB1, while for ordinary UEs (such as UEs that do not need positioning, or that require positioning but require positioning delay or power consumption, etc.) For UEs with low requirements), random access may still be performed according to the normal process. Therefore, the PUCCH in the first format can also implement a function, that is, the PUCCH in the first format can be used to request positioning, and the access network device According to the PUCCH in the first format, it is clear that there is a UE requesting positioning, and then according to the identity of the UE, the identity of the UE requesting positioning can be determined.
作为另一种可选的实施方式,该上行信道包括上行共享信道。在这种情况下,可选的,UE还可以向接入网设备发送请求信息,该请求信息用于请求定位,接入网设备接收该请求信息后,就能明确有UE请求定位,接入网设备再根据该UE的标识,就能确定请求定位的UE的身份。例如,UE可以先向接入网设备发送请求信息,之后再通过上行共享信道向接入网设备发送UE的标识;或者,UE也可以先通过上行共享信道向接入网设备发送UE的标识,再向接入网设备发送请求信息;或者,请求信息和UE的标识也可以一并发送,例如请求信息和UE的标识都可以承载在上行共享信道上一并发送给接入网设备。该上行共享信道例如为物理上行共享信道(physical uplink share channel,PUSCH)。以第一类型的系统信息是SIB1为例,SIB1可配置公共PUSCH,该公共PUSCH就可作为所述上行共享信道,目前UE在随机接入成功后可以使用SIB1所配置的公共PUSCH向接入网设备发送数据。本申请实施例中,UE在无需随机接入的情况下,可利用SIB1配置的公共PUSCH向接入网设备发送该UE的标识。As another optional implementation manner, the uplink channel includes an uplink shared channel. In this case, optionally, the UE may also send request information to the access network device, which is used to request positioning. After receiving the request information, the access network device can clearly confirm that there is a UE requesting positioning, and access The network device can then determine the identity of the UE requesting positioning according to the identity of the UE. For example, the UE may first send request information to the access network device, and then send the UE identifier to the access network device through the uplink shared channel; or, the UE may first send the UE identifier to the access network device through the uplink shared channel, Then send the request information to the access network device; or, the request information and the UE identifier can also be sent together, for example, both the request information and the UE identifier can be carried on the uplink shared channel and sent to the access network device together. The uplink shared channel is, for example, a physical uplink shared channel (physical uplink share channel, PUSCH). Taking the first type of system information as SIB1 as an example, SIB1 can be configured with a common PUSCH, which can be used as the uplink shared channel. At present, after successful random access, the UE can use the public PUSCH configured by SIB1 to report to the access network. The device sends data. In the embodiment of the present application, the UE may send the UE identifier to the access network device by using the public PUSCH configured by SIB1 without random access.
可选的,该请求信息例如为preamble。本申请实施例中UE虽然无需进行随机接入,但还是可以提供一种preamble,该preamble例如为用于定位的preamble。UE在发送该UE的标识之前,可以先向接入网设备发送该preamble,接入网设备接收该preamble后就可明确有UE请求定位。接着UE通过该公共PUSCH向接入网设备发送该UE的标识,则接入网设备可以明确请求定位的UE的身份。例如,SIB1包括版本16的信息A公共配置(msgA-ConfigCommon-r16),该IE可以配置公共PUSCH,以及可以配置preamble,本申请实施例令该msgA-ConfigCommon-r16配置用于定位的preamble,从而UE可以向接入网设备发送msgA-ConfigCommon-r16配置的preamble,以及可以在该msgA-ConfigCommon-r16配置的公共PUSCH上向接入网设备发送UE的标识。Optionally, the request information is, for example, a preamble. In the embodiment of the present application, although the UE does not need to perform random access, it can still provide a preamble, such as a preamble for positioning. Before sending the identity of the UE, the UE may first send the preamble to the access network device, and the access network device may confirm that there is a UE requesting positioning after receiving the preamble. Then the UE sends the identity of the UE to the access network device through the public PUSCH, and the access network device can specify the identity of the UE requesting positioning. For example, SIB1 includes information A common configuration (msgA-ConfigCommon-r16) of version 16, and this IE can be configured with a common PUSCH and a preamble. In this embodiment of the present application, the msgA-ConfigCommon-r16 is configured with a preamble for positioning, so that The UE may send the preamble configured by msgA-ConfigCommon-r16 to the access network device, and may send the identity of the UE to the access network device on the common PUSCH configured by msgA-ConfigCommon-r16.
这种可选的方案虽然应用了preamble,但只是借用了preamble来请求定位,而并不是执行随机接入流程,因此,虽然UE向接入网设备发送了preamble,但接入网设备接收preamble后可以不必向UE发送响应。另外,接入网设备接收UE的标识后也可以不必向UE发送响应。因此相对于现有的随机接入过程来说,本申请实施例的方案减少了信令交互流程,有利于节省UE的功耗。Although this optional solution uses a preamble, it only borrows the preamble to request positioning instead of performing a random access procedure. Therefore, although the UE sends the preamble to the access network device, the access network device receives the preamble It may not be necessary to send a response to the UE. In addition, the access network device does not need to send a response to the UE after receiving the identifier of the UE. Therefore, compared with the existing random access procedure, the solution of the embodiment of the present application reduces the signaling interaction process, which is beneficial to save the power consumption of the UE.
还有可能,UE直接向接入网设备发送上行参考信号,而不发送该UE的标识,因此S404为可选的步骤。It is also possible that the UE directly sends the uplink reference signal to the access network device without sending the identity of the UE, so S404 is an optional step.
S405、UE根据定位信息,向接入网设备发送上行参考信号。相应的,接入网设备从 UE接收上行参考信号。S405. The UE sends an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information. Correspondingly, the access network device receives the uplink reference signal from the UE.
UE通过定位信息获得了该上行参考信号的相应信息,例如获得了该上行参考信号的带宽等信息,则UE可根据获得的信息向接入网设备发送上行参考信号。The UE obtains the corresponding information of the uplink reference signal through the positioning information, for example, obtains information such as the bandwidth of the uplink reference signal, and then the UE may send the uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the obtained information.
可选的,上行参考信号可以是根据UE的标识确定的,或者说,UE根据UE的标识可确定上行参考信号,或者说,UE的标识可用于确定上行参考信号。Optionally, the uplink reference signal may be determined according to the identity of the UE, or in other words, the UE may determine the uplink reference signal according to the identity of the UE, or in other words, the identity of the UE may be used to determine the uplink reference signal.
在本申请实施例中,可能有多个UE都要请求定位,则这些UE都会向接入网设备发送上行参考信号。例如UE是以序列的形式发送上行参考信号,由于这些UE并未执行随机接入,接入网设备无法向这些UE发送单播消息,即无法为这些UE分别配置上行参考信号的序列标识(例如SRS的序列ID),那么这些UE在向接入网设备发送上行参考信号的序列时,很可能所发送的序列是相同的,这会造成UE间的干扰,而且接入网设备也无法识别所接收的上行参考信号究竟来自哪个UE,从而网络无法对UE进行定位。因此,上行参考信号根据UE的标识确定的一种可选的实施方式为,上行参考信号的序列标识可根据UE的标识确定,或者说,UE可根据该UE的标识来确定上行参考信号的序列标识。In the embodiment of the present application, there may be multiple UEs requesting positioning, and all these UEs will send uplink reference signals to the access network device. For example, UEs send uplink reference signals in the form of sequences. Since these UEs do not perform random access, the access network equipment cannot send unicast messages to these UEs, that is, they cannot configure sequence identifiers of uplink reference signals for these UEs (for example, SRS sequence ID), then when these UEs send the sequence of the uplink reference signal to the access network equipment, it is likely that the sequence sent is the same, which will cause interference between UEs, and the access network equipment cannot identify all the uplink reference signal sequences. Which UE does the received uplink reference signal come from, so that the network cannot locate the UE. Therefore, an optional implementation manner in which the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identity of the UE is that the sequence identity of the uplink reference signal can be determined according to the identity of the UE, or in other words, the UE can determine the sequence of the uplink reference signal according to the identity of the UE logo.
以上行参考信号是SRS为例。目前SRS序列由ZC序列组成,不同的SRS序列主要通过配置不同的序列初始化ID来实现,即,不同的序列标识就对应了不同的SRS序列,因此,只要SRS的序列标识不同,则对应的SRS序列就不同。那么,由于不同UE的标识不同,从而不同UE确定的上行参考信号的序列标识不同,则不同UE确定的序列就是不同的,这样可以减小UE之间的干扰。而UE也将UE的标识发送给了接入网设备,则接入网设备也能够确定UE的上行参考信号的序列标识,从而使得接入网设备能够识别上行参考信号与UE之间的关系,能够正确检测上行参考信号,也能正确对UE进行定位。The uplink reference signal is an SRS as an example. At present, SRS sequences are composed of ZC sequences. Different SRS sequences are mainly realized by configuring different sequence initialization IDs, that is, different sequence IDs correspond to different SRS sequences. Therefore, as long as the SRS sequence IDs are different, the corresponding SRS The sequence is different. Then, since the identities of different UEs are different, the sequence identities of the uplink reference signals determined by different UEs are different, and the sequences determined by different UEs are different, which can reduce the interference between UEs. The UE also sends the UE identifier to the access network device, and the access network device can also determine the sequence identifier of the UE's uplink reference signal, so that the access network device can identify the relationship between the uplink reference signal and the UE, The uplink reference signal can be detected correctly, and the UE can also be positioned correctly.
根据UE的标识确定上行参考信号的序列标识,可能有多种方式。例如一种方式为,UE的标识与上行参考信号的序列标识相同。在这种情况下,UE直接将该UE的标识作为上行参考信号的序列标识即可。例如参考表1,为UE的标识与上行参考信号的序列标识相同的示例。表1中,以十进制为例。There may be multiple ways to determine the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal according to the identifier of the UE. For example, in one manner, the identifier of the UE is the same as the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal. In this case, the UE may directly use the UE identifier as the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal. For example, refer to Table 1, which is an example in which the identifier of the UE is the same as the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal. In Table 1, the decimal system is taken as an example.
表1Table 1
UE的标识(十进制)UE ID (decimal) 上行参考信号的序列标识(十进制)Sequence ID of the uplink reference signal (decimal)
10011001 10011001
10021002 10021002
又例如,另一种方式为,上行参考信号的序列标识是UE的标识的一部分,例如,上行参考信号的序列标识是UE的标识的高K位,或者是UE的标识的低K位,或者是UE的标识的中间K位等,K为正整数。在这种情况下,UE对该UE的标识进行截取,就可得到上行参考信号的序列标识,至于究竟截取哪部分,即,K的取值以及这K位在UE的标识中的位置,可由接入网设备配置,或者预配置在UE中,或者通过协议预定义。例如参考表2,为上行参考信号的序列标识是UE的标识的一部分的示例。表2中,以十进制为例。For another example, another way is that the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is a part of the identity of the UE, for example, the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is the high K bits of the UE identity, or the low K bits of the UE identity, or is the middle K bits of the identity of the UE, etc., and K is a positive integer. In this case, the UE intercepts the identity of the UE to obtain the sequence identity of the uplink reference signal. As for which part to intercept, that is, the value of K and the position of the K bit in the identity of the UE, it can be determined by The configuration of the access network equipment is either pre-configured in the UE, or predefined through a protocol. For example, referring to Table 2, it is an example that the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is a part of the identifier of the UE. In Table 2, the decimal system is taken as an example.
表2Table 2
UE的标识(十进制)UE ID (decimal) 上行参考信号的序列标识(十进制)Sequence ID of the uplink reference signal (decimal)
10011001 11
10021002 22
表2中,以取UE的标识的最后一位作为上行参考信号的序列标识为例。In Table 2, take the last bit of the UE ID as the sequence ID of the uplink reference signal as an example.
又例如,请参考表3,为上行参考信号的序列标识是UE的标识的一部分的另一种示例。表3中,以二进制为例。For another example, please refer to Table 3, which is another example in which the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is a part of the identifier of the UE. In Table 3, binary is taken as an example.
表3table 3
Figure PCTCN2022115217-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2022115217-appb-000003
表3中,以取UE的标识的低4位作为上行参考信号的序列标识为例。例如UE的标识为“10100101”,取该标识的低4位,则为“0101”,那么“0101”就可作为上行参考信号的序列标识。如果将“0101”换算为十进制,则为“9”。In Table 3, take the lower 4 bits of the UE ID as the sequence ID of the uplink reference signal as an example. For example, the ID of the UE is "10100101", and the lower 4 bits of the ID are taken to be "0101", then "0101" can be used as the sequence ID of the uplink reference signal. If you convert "0101" to decimal, it will be "9".
再例如,又一种方式为,上行参考信号的序列标识是对UE的标识取模得到的。例如,上行参考信号的序列标识可满足如下关系:For another example, in yet another manner, the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is obtained by moduloing the identifier of the UE. For example, the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal may satisfy the following relationship:
上行参考信号的序列标识=X mod(Y)     (公式3)Sequence ID of uplink reference signal = X mod(Y) (Formula 3)
其中,X表示UE的标识,或者表示UE的标识的一部分(例如,根据上述方式从UE的标识中截取出的一部分),Y表示第一取模系数,mod表示取模运算。Y可以预配置在UE中,或者由接入网设备配置,或者通过协议预定义。例如参考表4,为上行参考信号的序列标识是对UE的标识取模得到为例。表4中,以十进制为例。Wherein, X represents the identity of the UE, or represents a part of the identity of the UE (for example, a part intercepted from the identity of the UE according to the above method), Y represents the first modulo coefficient, and mod represents a modulo operation. Y may be pre-configured in the UE, or configured by the access network device, or predefined by a protocol. For example, referring to Table 4, it is an example that the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is obtained modulo the identifier of the UE. In Table 4, decimal is taken as an example.
表4Table 4
Figure PCTCN2022115217-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2022115217-appb-000004
根据表4可见,当Y不同时,即使UE的标识相同,所得到的上行参考信号的序列标识也可能不同。It can be seen from Table 4 that when Y is different, even if the UE IDs are the same, the obtained sequence IDs of the uplink reference signals may be different.
UE可能采用上述任一种方式确定上行参考信号的序列标识,对于接入网设备来说,因为接收了UE的标识,而UE的标识可用于确定上行参考信号,因此接入网设备可采用与UE相同的方式确定上行参考信号的序列标识。UE和接入网设备所采用的方式例如预配置在UE和接入网设备中,或者通过协议预定义,或者由接入网设备配置,从而UE能够向接入网设备发送上行参考信号,接入网设备也能够正确检测来自UE的上行参考信号。The UE may use any of the above methods to determine the sequence identity of the uplink reference signal. For the access network equipment, because the identity of the UE is received, and the identity of the UE can be used to determine the uplink reference signal, the access network equipment can use the same method as The UE determines the sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal in the same manner. The method adopted by the UE and the access network device is, for example, pre-configured in the UE and the access network device, or is predefined by the protocol, or is configured by the access network device, so that the UE can send an uplink reference signal to the access network device, and then The network access device can also correctly detect the uplink reference signal from the UE.
可选的,上行参考信号根据UE的标识确定的另一种可选的实施方式为,上行参考信号的时域位置和/或频域位置可根据UE的标识确定,或者说,UE还可以根据UE的标识确定上行参考信号的时域位置和/或频域位置。可理解为,上行参考信号的序列标识可根据UE的标识确定,和/或,上行参考信号的时域位置和/或频域位置可根据UE的标识确定。Optionally, another optional implementation manner in which the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identity of the UE is that the time domain position and/or the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal can be determined according to the identity of the UE, or in other words, the UE can also be determined according to The identity of the UE determines the time domain position and/or the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal. It can be understood that the sequence identity of the uplink reference signal can be determined according to the identity of the UE, and/or the time domain position and/or frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal can be determined according to the identity of the UE.
例如,上行参考信号的时域位置包括上行参考信号所在的时隙,上行参考信号所在的时隙可根据UE的标识确定,或者说,UE可根据UE的标识确定上行参考信号所在的时隙。 一种可选的确定方式为,上行参考信号所在的时隙的编号根据UE的标识和一个子帧(subframe)包括的时隙个数确定,或者理解为,上行参考信号所在的时隙的编号根据UE的标识确定,而上行参考信号所在的时隙的编号是该上行参考信号所在的时隙在一个系统帧(system frame)内的编号。其中,系统帧也可以称为无线帧(radio frame)等。例如,上行参考信号所在的时隙的编号满足如下关系:For example, the time domain position of the uplink reference signal includes the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located, and the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located can be determined according to the identity of the UE, or in other words, the UE can determine the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located according to the identity of the UE. An optional determination method is that the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located is determined according to the identity of the UE and the number of time slots included in a subframe (subframe), or it can be understood as the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located It is determined according to the identifier of the UE, and the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located is the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located in a system frame (system frame). Wherein, the system frame may also be referred to as a radio frame (radio frame) or the like. For example, the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located satisfies the following relationship:
上行参考信号所在的时隙的编号=X mod Z     (公式4)The number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located = X mod Z (Formula 4)
其中,X表示UE的标识,Z表示取模系数,Z例如为一个系统帧所包括的时隙的个数。例如Z=10,则不同的UE所确定的上行参考信号所在的时隙的一种示例可参考图5。图5以4个UE为例,这4个UE的标识分别为1001、1002、1003和1004,图5中的周期=10表示一个系统帧的长度。从图5可以看到,标识为1001的UE所确定的上行参考信号所在的时隙的编号为1,标识为1002的UE所确定的上行参考信号所在的时隙的编号为2,标识为1003的UE所确定的上行参考信号所在的时隙的编号为3,标识为1004的UE所确定的上行参考信号所在的时隙的编号为4。Wherein, X represents the identity of the UE, Z represents a modulus coefficient, and Z is, for example, the number of time slots included in one system frame. For example, if Z=10, refer to FIG. 5 for an example of the time slots where the uplink reference signals are determined by different UEs. FIG. 5 takes four UEs as an example. The identities of these four UEs are 1001, 1002, 1003 and 1004 respectively. Period=10 in FIG. 5 indicates the length of one system frame. It can be seen from FIG. 5 that the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is determined by the UE identified as 1001 is 1, the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is determined by the UE identified as 1002 is 2, and the number of the time slot is 1003 The number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is determined by the UE is 3, and the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is determined by the UE identified as 1004 is 4.
又例如,上行参考信号的时域位置包括上行参考信号的时域起始位置,上行参考信号的时域起始位置可根据UE的标识确定,或者说,UE可根据UE的标识确定上行参考信号的时域起始位置。可选的,上行参考信号的时域起始位置可根据UE的标识确定,具体可以是,上行参考信号的时域起始位置根据UE的标识和上行参考信号的配置信息确定。上行参考信号的时域起始位置例如为上行参考信号的起始符号(symbol),一种可选的确定方式为,上行参考信号的起始符号的编号根据UE的标识和第一信息确定,第一信息包括上行参考信号占用的符号个数和/或一个时隙所包括的符号个数。以第一信息包括上行参考信号占用的符号个数以及一个时隙所包括的符号个数为例,例如,上行参考信号的起始符号的编号满足如下关系:For another example, the time domain position of the uplink reference signal includes the time domain start position of the uplink reference signal, and the time domain start position of the uplink reference signal can be determined according to the identity of the UE, or in other words, the UE can determine the uplink reference signal according to the identity of the UE The starting position of the time domain. Optionally, the start position of the time domain of the uplink reference signal may be determined according to the identity of the UE. Specifically, the start position of the time domain of the uplink reference signal may be determined according to the identity of the UE and configuration information of the uplink reference signal. The time-domain start position of the uplink reference signal is, for example, the start symbol (symbol) of the uplink reference signal. An optional determination method is that the number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identifier of the UE and the first information, The first information includes the number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal and/or the number of symbols included in one time slot. Taking the first information including the number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal and the number of symbols included in a time slot as an example, for example, the number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal satisfies the following relationship:
上行参考信号的起始符号的编号=X×M mod N    (公式5)The number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal = X×M mod N (Formula 5)
其中,X表示UE的标识,M表示上行参考信号占用的符号个数,N为一个时隙所包括的符号个数。其中,M例如通过上行参考信号的配置信息进行配置。上行参考信号的起始符号的编号,例如为上行参考信号的起始符号在一个时隙内的编号。例如M=4、N=14,则不同UE所确定的上行参考信号的起始符号的编号可参考图6。图6以3个UE为例,这3个UE的标识分别为1001、1002、1003,其中,标识为1001的UE确定的上行参考信号的起始符号的编号为0,该上行参考信号占用4个符号;标识为1002的UE确定的上行参考信号的起始符号的编号为4,该上行参考信号占用4个符号;标识为1003的UE确定的上行参考信号的起始符号的编号为8,该上行参考信号占用4个符号。Wherein, X represents the identity of the UE, M represents the number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal, and N is the number of symbols included in one time slot. Wherein, M is configured by, for example, the configuration information of the uplink reference signal. The number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal is, for example, the number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal in one time slot. For example, M=4, N=14, then the numbers of the start symbols of the uplink reference signals determined by different UEs can refer to FIG. 6 . Figure 6 takes three UEs as an example, the identifiers of these three UEs are 1001, 1002, and 1003 respectively, wherein the number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal determined by the UE with the identifier 1001 is 0, and the uplink reference signal occupies 4 symbols; the number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal determined by the UE identified as 1002 is 4, and the uplink reference signal occupies 4 symbols; the number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal determined by the UE identified as 1003 is 8, The uplink reference signal occupies 4 symbols.
再例如,上行参考信号的频域位置包括上行参考信号的频域起始位置,上行参考信号的频域起始位置可根据UE的标识确定,或者说,UE可根据UE的标识确定上行参考信号的频域起始位置。可选的,UE根据UE的标识确定上行参考信号的频域起始位置,具体可以包括,UE根据UE的标识和上行参考信号的配置信息确定上行参考信号的频域起始位置。一种可选的确定方式为,上行参考信号的频域起始位置所在的子载波的偏置(或者,子载波的编号)根据UE的标识和上行参考信号在频域的梳齿信息确定。例如,上行参考信号的频域起始位置所在的子载波的偏置满足如下关系:For another example, the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal includes the frequency domain start position of the uplink reference signal, and the frequency domain start position of the uplink reference signal can be determined according to the identity of the UE, or in other words, the UE can determine the uplink reference signal according to the identity of the UE The frequency domain starting position of . Optionally, the UE determines the frequency-domain start position of the uplink reference signal according to the UE identifier, which may specifically include that the UE determines the frequency-domain start position of the uplink reference signal according to the UE identifier and configuration information of the uplink reference signal. An optional determination method is that the offset of the subcarrier (or the number of the subcarrier) where the frequency domain start position of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identity of the UE and the comb information of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain. For example, the offset of the subcarrier where the frequency domain starting position of the uplink reference signal is located satisfies the following relationship:
上行参考信号的频域起始位置所在的子载波的编号=X mod Q   (公式6)The number of the subcarrier where the frequency domain starting position of the uplink reference signal is located = X mod Q (Formula 6)
其中,X表示UE的标识,Q表示上行参考信号在频域的梳齿信息,例如Q通过上行 参考信号的配置信息进行配置。例如Q=4、M=4、N=14,则不同的UE确定的上行参考信号在频域的位置可参考图7。图7以3个UE为例,这3个UE的标识分别为1001、1002、1003,其中,画横线的方框表示标识为1001的UE所在的频域位置,画“/”的方框表示标识为1002的UE所在的频域位置,画“\”的方框表示标识为1003的UE所在的频域位置。Wherein, X represents the identity of the UE, and Q represents the comb information of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain, for example, Q is configured through the configuration information of the uplink reference signal. For example, if Q=4, M=4, and N=14, the positions of the uplink reference signals determined by different UEs in the frequency domain may refer to FIG. 7 . Figure 7 takes three UEs as an example. The identifiers of these three UEs are 1001, 1002, and 1003 respectively. Among them, the box with a horizontal line indicates the frequency domain position of the UE with the identifier of 1001, and the box with "/" Indicates the frequency domain position where the UE identified as 1002 is located, and the box drawn with "\" indicates the frequency domain position where the UE identified as 1003 is located.
或者,UE根据UE的标识也可能不是直接确定上行参考信号的时域位置和/或频域位置,而是确定上行参考信号的时域信息和/或频域信息,再进一步根据上行参考信号的时域信息确定上行参考信号的时域位置,根据上行参考信号的频域信息确定上行参考信号的频域位置。例如,上行参考信号的时域信息包括上行参考信号所在的时隙的编号,和/或包括上行参考信号的起始符号的编号;上行参考信号的频域信息例如包括上行参考信号的频域起始位置信息。也就是说,UE根据UE的标识(或者,根据UE的标识和上行参考信号的配置信息)可以直接确定上行参考信号的时域位置和/或频域位置,而不会先确定上行参考信号的时域信息和/或频域信息再进一步确定资源位置;或者,UE根据UE的标识(或者,根据UE的标识和上行参考信号的配置信息)可以先确定上行参考信号的时域信息和/或频域信息,再进一步根据上行参考信号的时域信息和/或频域信息确定资源位置。Alternatively, the UE may not directly determine the time domain position and/or frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal according to the UE identity, but determine the time domain information and/or frequency domain information of the uplink reference signal, and then further determine the time domain information and/or frequency domain information according to the uplink reference signal The time domain information determines the time domain position of the uplink reference signal, and determines the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal according to the frequency domain information of the uplink reference signal. For example, the time domain information of the uplink reference signal includes the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located, and/or includes the number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal; initial location information. That is to say, the UE can directly determine the time-domain position and/or frequency-domain position of the uplink reference signal according to the UE identity (or, according to the UE identity and the configuration information of the uplink reference signal), without first determining the position of the uplink reference signal. The time domain information and/or frequency domain information further determine the resource location; or, the UE may first determine the time domain information and/or The frequency domain information further determines the resource location according to the time domain information and/or frequency domain information of the uplink reference signal.
或者,UE根据UE的标识也可能不是确定上行参考信号的时域位置和/或频域位置,而是确定上行参考信号的时域资源和/或频域资源。确定了资源,也就相当于确定了资源位置。Alternatively, the UE may not determine the time-domain position and/or the frequency-domain position of the uplink reference signal according to the identity of the UE, but determine the time-domain resource and/or the frequency-domain resource of the uplink reference signal. Determining the resource is equivalent to determining the location of the resource.
对于接入网设备来说,因为接收了UE的标识,而UE的标识可用于确定上行参考信号,因此接入网设备可采用与UE相同的方式确定上行参考信号的时域位置和频域位置(或者,采用与UE相同的方式确定上行参考信号的时域信息和频域信息,再进一步根据上行参考信号的时域信息和/或频域信息确定资源位置;或者,采用与UE相同的方式确定上行参考信号的时域资源和频域资源)。For the access network device, because the UE ID is received, and the UE ID can be used to determine the uplink reference signal, the access network device can determine the time domain position and frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal in the same way as the UE (Or, determine the time domain information and frequency domain information of the uplink reference signal in the same way as the UE, and further determine the resource location according to the time domain information and/or frequency domain information of the uplink reference signal; or, use the same method as the UE Determining time-domain resources and frequency-domain resources of the uplink reference signal).
其中,如果上行参考信号的时域位置(或,时域信息,或,时域资源)根据UE的标识确定,则定位信息可不包括上行参考信号的时域信息;如果上行参考信号的频域位置(或,频域信息,或,频域资源)根据UE的标识确定,则定位信息可不包括上行参考信号的频域信息。例如,上行参考信号所在的时隙根据UE的标识确定,则定位信息可不包括上行参考信号所在的时隙的编号;或者,定位信息包括上行参考信号所在的时隙的编号,则UE和接入网设备不再根据UE的标识确定上行参考信号所在的时隙。又例如,上行参考信号的起始符号根据UE的标识确定,则定位信息可不包括上行参考信号的时域起始位置信息;或者,定位信息包括上行参考信号的时域起始位置信息,则UE和接入网设备不再根据UE的标识确定上行参考信号的起始符号。再例如,上行参考信号的频域起始位置根据UE的标识确定,则定位信息可不包括上行参考信号的频域起始位置信息;或者,定位信息包括上行参考信号的频域起始位置信息,则UE和接入网设备不再根据UE的标识确定上行参考信号的频域起始位置。Wherein, if the time domain position (or time domain information, or time domain resource) of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identity of the UE, the positioning information may not include the time domain information of the uplink reference signal; if the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal (or, frequency domain information, or, frequency domain resources) is determined according to the identity of the UE, and the positioning information may not include the frequency domain information of the uplink reference signal. For example, if the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located is determined according to the identity of the UE, the positioning information may not include the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located; or, the positioning information includes the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located, then the UE and the access The network device no longer determines the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located according to the identity of the UE. For another example, if the start symbol of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identity of the UE, the positioning information may not include the time domain start position information of the uplink reference signal; or, the positioning information includes the time domain start position information of the uplink reference signal, then the UE and the access network device no longer determine the start symbol of the uplink reference signal according to the identity of the UE. For another example, if the starting position in the frequency domain of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identity of the UE, the positioning information may not include the starting position information in the frequency domain of the uplink reference signal; or, the positioning information includes information about the starting position in the frequency domain of the uplink reference signal, Then the UE and the access network device no longer determine the frequency-domain starting position of the uplink reference signal according to the identity of the UE.
S405与图3所示的实施例中的S303可以是同一步骤。S405 may be the same step as S303 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 .
S406、接入网设备向AMF发送第一定位请求。相应的,AMF从接入网设备接收第一定位请求。S406. The access network device sends a first positioning request to the AMF. Correspondingly, the AMF receives the first positioning request from the access network device.
第一定位请求可请求对UE进行定位,例如第一定位请求包括该UE的标识。The first positioning request may request to locate the UE, for example, the first positioning request includes the identifier of the UE.
可选的,AMF接收第一定位请求后,可对该UE进行鉴权。例如,如果该UE已经注册到了核心网,则AMF可以根据该UE的标识确定该UE的注册信息,从而根据该UE的 注册信息对该UE进行鉴权,以确定该UE是否合法。而如果该UE未注册到核心网(例如后文中将要介绍,该UE的协议栈可能经过了剪裁,并未保留非接入层(non-access stratum,NAS),则该UE可能无法注册到核心网),则AMF内可能预存了一个或多个允许被定位的UE的信息,例如预存了这些UE的标识,则AMF可以确定该UE的标识是否已被预存,如果该UE的标识已被预存,则确定该UE合法,否则确定该UE不合法。Optionally, after receiving the first location request, the AMF may authenticate the UE. For example, if the UE has registered with the core network, the AMF can determine the registration information of the UE according to the identity of the UE, so as to authenticate the UE according to the registration information of the UE to determine whether the UE is legal. And if the UE is not registered with the core network (for example, as will be introduced later, the protocol stack of the UE may have been tailored without retaining the non-access stratum (NAS), the UE may not be able to register with the core network. network), the information of one or more UEs allowed to be located may be pre-stored in the AMF, for example, the identities of these UEs are pre-stored, and the AMF can determine whether the UE identities have been pre-stored, and if the UE identities have been pre-stored , it is determined that the UE is legal, otherwise it is determined that the UE is not legal.
如果AMF对该UE进行了鉴权,那么,如果AMF确定该UE合法,则可继续执行后续步骤;如果AMF确定该UE不合法,则可以不必执行后续步骤,例如AMF可以不向LMF请求定位,可选的,AMF可以向接入网设备发送拒绝定位的信息,从而结束定位流程。If the AMF has authenticated the UE, then if the AMF determines that the UE is legal, the subsequent steps may be performed; if the AMF determines that the UE is not legal, the subsequent steps may not be performed, for example, the AMF may not request the LMF for positioning, Optionally, the AMF may send a location rejection message to the access network device, thereby ending the location procedure.
S407、AMF向LMF发送第二定位请求。相应的,LMF从AMF接收第二定位请求。例如第二定位请求包括UE的标识。S407. The AMF sends a second positioning request to the LMF. Correspondingly, the LMF receives the second positioning request from the AMF. For example, the second positioning request includes the identifier of the UE.
需要注意的是,S407中第二定位请求包括的UE的标识,与前述各个步骤中的UE的标识,可以相同也可以不同。为了加以区分,将前述S401~S406所涉及的UE的标识称为第一标识,将S407中AMF发送给LMF的UE的标识称为第二标识。第一标识和第二标识均为该UE的标识,但这两者可以相同也可以不同。例如,AMF可直接将第一标识发送给LMF,则第一标识与第二标识相同;或者,AMF也可对第一标识进行处理,得到第二标识,再将第二标识发送给LMF,则第一标识与第二标识不同。例如AMF对第一标识的一种处理方式为,AMF根据第一标识确定上行参考信号的序列标识(确定方式可参考前文),则上行参考信号的序列标识可作为第二标识;又例如,另一种处理方式为,AMF根据第一标识确定上行参考信号的时域起始位置所在的符号的编号(确定方式可参考前文),则上行参考信号的时域起始位置所在的符号的编号可作为第二标识;再例如,AMF根据第一标识确定上行参考信号的频域起始位置所在的子载波的编号(确定方式可参考前文),则上行参考信号的频域起始位置所在的子载波的编号可作为第二标识。在如上几种方式中,虽然第二标识实际上是用于标识上行参考信号,但由于上行参考信号也是根据UE的标识确定,因此也可根据如上的第二标识均是用于标识该UE。It should be noted that the UE ID included in the second positioning request in S407 may be the same as or different from the UE ID in the preceding steps. In order to distinguish, the identity of the UE involved in S401-S406 is called the first identity, and the identity of the UE sent by the AMF to the LMF in S407 is called the second identity. Both the first identity and the second identity are the identity of the UE, but they may be the same or different. For example, the AMF can directly send the first identifier to the LMF, then the first identifier is the same as the second identifier; or, the AMF can also process the first identifier to obtain the second identifier, and then send the second identifier to the LMF, then The first identification is different from the second identification. For example, one processing method of the AMF for the first identification is that the AMF determines the sequence identification of the uplink reference signal according to the first identification (refer to the above for the determination method), then the sequence identification of the uplink reference signal can be used as the second identification; another example, another One processing method is that the AMF determines the number of the symbol where the time domain start position of the uplink reference signal is located according to the first identifier (refer to the above for the determination method), then the number of the symbol where the time domain start position of the uplink reference signal is located can be As the second identifier; for another example, the AMF determines the number of the subcarrier where the frequency domain start position of the uplink reference signal is located according to the first identifier (refer to the above for the determination method), then the subcarrier where the frequency domain start position of the uplink reference signal is located The serial number of the carrier can be used as the second identifier. In the above several manners, although the second identity is actually used to identify the uplink reference signal, since the uplink reference signal is also determined according to the identity of the UE, it can also be used to identify the UE according to the above second identity.
S408、LMF向接入网设备发送第一请求消息。相应的,接入网设备从LMF接收第一请求消息。第一请求消息用于请求获取用于配置上行参考信号的信息。S408. The LMF sends a first request message to the access network device. Correspondingly, the access network device receives the first request message from the LMF. The first request message is used to request to obtain information for configuring the uplink reference signal.
S409、接入网设备向LMF发送定位响应消息。相应的,LMF从接入网设备接收定位响应消息。第一响应消息可包括用于配置上行参考信号的信息,例如第一响应消息包括定位信息或第一配置信息。S409. The access network device sends a location response message to the LMF. Correspondingly, the LMF receives a location response message from the access network device. The first response message may include information for configuring the uplink reference signal, for example, the first response message includes positioning information or first configuration information.
S410、LMF向多个接入网设备发送测量请求。相应的,多个接入网设备从LMF接收测量请求。多个接入网设备例如包括所述接入网设备,则S410以所述接入网设备从LMF接收测量请求为例。S410. The LMF sends measurement requests to multiple access network devices. Correspondingly, multiple access network devices receive measurement requests from the LMF. For example, multiple access network devices include the access network device, and S410 takes the access network device receiving a measurement request from the LMF as an example.
多个接入网设备究竟包括哪些接入网设备,可由LMF确定,例如LMF可选择信道质量较好的多个接入网设备,或者选择负载较轻的多个接入网设备等。Which access network devices are included in the multiple access network devices can be determined by the LMF, for example, the LMF can select multiple access network devices with better channel quality, or select multiple access network devices with lighter loads, etc.
测量请求可包括定位信息,或者包括第一配置信息。可选的,测量请求还可以包括第三标识,第三标识例如是LMF根据第二标识得到的。例如第三标识与第二标识相同,或者第三标识与第二标识不同。例如,AMF直接将第一标识发送给LMF,则第一标识就是第二标识,或者说第一标识与第二标识相同。LMF可直接将第二标识发送给多个接入网设备,则第二标识就是第三标识,或者说第二标识与第三标识相同;或者,LMF也可对第二 标识(第二标识与第一标识相同或不同)进行处理,得到第三标识,再将第三标识发送给接入网设备,则第二标识与第三标识不同。关于LMF对第二标识进行处理的方式,可参考S407中介绍的AMF对第一标识的处理方式。The measurement request may include positioning information, or include first configuration information. Optionally, the measurement request may further include a third identifier, for example, the third identifier is obtained by the LMF according to the second identifier. For example, the third identifier is the same as the second identifier, or the third identifier is different from the second identifier. For example, if the AMF directly sends the first identifier to the LMF, then the first identifier is the second identifier, or the first identifier is the same as the second identifier. The LMF may directly send the second identifier to multiple access network devices, then the second identifier is the third identifier, or the second identifier is the same as the third identifier; or, the LMF may also send the second identifier (the second identifier and the third identifier The first identifier is the same or different) to obtain the third identifier, and then send the third identifier to the access network device, then the second identifier is different from the third identifier. For the manner in which the LMF processes the second identifier, reference may be made to the manner in which the AMF processes the first identifier introduced in S407.
测量请求之所以包括第三标识,是为了使得多个接入网设备根据第三标识确定该UE发送的上行参考信号,从而能够检测来自该UE的上行参考信号。关于接入网设备根据第三标识确定上行参考信号的过程,可参考前文中UE根据UE的标识(第一标识)确定上行参考信号的过程。The reason why the measurement request includes the third identifier is to enable multiple access network devices to determine the uplink reference signal sent by the UE according to the third identifier, so as to be able to detect the uplink reference signal from the UE. Regarding the process for the access network device to determine the uplink reference signal according to the third identifier, reference may be made to the above process for the UE to determine the uplink reference signal according to the UE identifier (first identifier).
S411、接入网设备向LMF发送测量结果。相应的,LMF从接入网设备接收测量结果。S411. The access network device sends the measurement result to the LMF. Correspondingly, the LMF receives the measurement result from the access network device.
多个接入网设备中的每个接入网设备在从UE接收上行参考信号后,都可以对该上行参考信号进行测量,得到测量结果。其中,接入网设备得到的测量结果例如包括相对到达时间(relative time of arrival,RTOA)和/或到达角(angle of arrival,AOA)等信息。多个接入网设备均可以向LMF发送得到的测量结果,图4以该UE的服务基站(即,所述接入网设备)向LMF发送测量结果为例。After each access network device among the plurality of access network devices receives the uplink reference signal from the UE, it can measure the uplink reference signal to obtain a measurement result. Wherein, the measurement result obtained by the access network device includes, for example, information such as relative time of arrival (relative time of arrival, RTOA) and/or angle of arrival (angle of arrival, AOA). Multiple access network devices can send the obtained measurement results to the LMF. FIG. 4 takes the UE's serving base station (that is, the access network device) sending the measurement results to the LMF as an example.
S412、LMF根据测量结果确定UE的位置。S412. The LMF determines the location of the UE according to the measurement result.
LMF例如从多个接入网设备接收了多个测量结果,则LMF可根据多个测量结果确定UE的位置。关于LMF确定UE的位置的方式,可参考图1A所示的流程中的S116的介绍。For example, the LMF has received multiple measurement results from multiple access network devices, and the LMF can determine the location of the UE according to the multiple measurement results. Regarding the manner in which the LMF determines the location of the UE, reference may be made to the introduction of S116 in the process shown in FIG. 1A .
其中,S406~S412均为可选的步骤,例如接入网设备从UE接收上行参考信号后,网络还可以采用其他方式对UE进行定位。Wherein, S406-S412 are optional steps. For example, after the access network device receives the uplink reference signal from the UE, the network may also use other methods to locate the UE.
本申请实施例所述的UE,例如为定位专用的UE,或者说,该UE仅用于定位。即,该UE可能只需要实现定位相关的功能,并不需要实现除此之外更多的功能,由此能够使得该UE以较低的功耗实现定位。例如,本申请实施例的UE可实现的功能包括如下一项或多项:小区搜索(例如包括接收广播信道和/或接收下行控制信道等),发送定位参考信号(例如本申请实施例所述的上行参考信号),发送上行控制信道,或,发送上行共享信道。该UE可没有NAS层,还可能没有发送RRC建立请求等功能。The UE described in the embodiment of the present application is, for example, a UE dedicated to positioning, or in other words, the UE is only used for positioning. That is, the UE may only need to implement positioning-related functions, and does not need to implement other functions, thereby enabling the UE to implement positioning with lower power consumption. For example, the functions that can be implemented by the UE in the embodiment of the present application include one or more of the following: cell search (for example, including receiving broadcast channels and/or receiving downlink control channels, etc.), sending positioning reference signals (for example, as described in the embodiments of the present application) uplink reference signal), send an uplink control channel, or send an uplink shared channel. The UE may not have a NAS layer, and may not have functions such as sending an RRC establishment request.
可选的,可以裁剪UE当前的协议栈,例如在UE侧可剪掉通信相关的功能,只是保留定位相关的功能,这样裁剪后的UE就是本申请实施例中的定位专用的UE。可参考图8,为裁剪前的协议栈示意图。图8中,UE与AMF均包括NAS层,另外,UE与基站均包括RRC层、分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层、无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层以及物理(PHY)层。可再参考图9,为裁剪后的协议栈示意图。图9中,NAS层用虚线表示,表明NAS层已被剪掉。另外图9中,虽然UE侧还是保留了RRC层、PDCP层、RLC层、MAC层以及PHY层,但是图9中用于表示这些层的方框相较于图8中要窄,是用于表示剪掉了这些层中与通信相关的部分或全部功能,保留了与定位相关的功能。图9中,基站侧依然包括RRC层、PDCP层、RLC层、MAC层以及PHY层,即,基站侧的协议栈可以不被裁剪,但基站的这些协议栈中用于服务于图9所示的UE的功能可能有所减少,画斜线的部分表示基站侧的协议栈服务于该UE的功能。Optionally, the current protocol stack of the UE can be tailored. For example, communication-related functions can be deleted on the UE side, and only positioning-related functions can be reserved. In this way, the tailored UE is a positioning-specific UE in this embodiment of the application. Refer to FIG. 8 , which is a schematic diagram of the protocol stack before pruning. In Figure 8, both UE and AMF include the NAS layer. In addition, both the UE and the base station include the RRC layer, packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer, radio link control (radio link control, RLC) layer, media Access control (media access control, MAC) layer and physical (PHY) layer. Refer to FIG. 9 again, which is a schematic diagram of the protocol stack after pruning. In Figure 9, the NAS layer is represented by a dotted line, indicating that the NAS layer has been cut off. In addition, in FIG. 9, although the RRC layer, PDCP layer, RLC layer, MAC layer, and PHY layer are still reserved on the UE side, the boxes used to represent these layers in FIG. 9 are narrower than those in FIG. Indicates that some or all functions related to communication in these layers are cut off, and functions related to positioning are retained. In Figure 9, the base station side still includes the RRC layer, PDCP layer, RLC layer, MAC layer, and PHY layer, that is, the protocol stack on the base station side may not be tailored, but these protocol stacks of the base station are used to serve the services shown in Figure 9. The functions of the UE may be reduced, and the hatched part indicates that the protocol stack on the base station side serves the functions of the UE.
或者,本申请实施例所述的UE也可以是普通的UE,并不是定位专用UE,例如也无需对UE的协议栈进行裁剪等。也就是说,本申请实施例所提供的方案能够适用于各种类型的UE。Alternatively, the UE described in this embodiment of the present application may also be an ordinary UE, not a UE dedicated to positioning, for example, there is no need to tailor the protocol stack of the UE. That is to say, the solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various types of UEs.
本申请实施例中,用于配置上行参考信号的定位信息可以包括在系统信息中,UE通 过接收系统信息就能获得定位信息,而UE获得定位信息后就能向接入网设备发送上行参考信号,而无需完成随机接入,或者说,UE在无需进行随机接入的情况下就能向接入网设备发送上行参考信号,从而网络就能对该UE进行定位。通过本申请实施例提供的方案,减少了UE在被定位前原本需要执行的随机接入等通信流程,能够简化定位过程。而且由于减少了UE需要执行的通信流程,则无需在UE内部置入随机接入相关的代码,由此能够减小UE的存储空间,从而节省UE的功耗。另外,包括了定位信息的系统信息为第一类型,例如第一类型的系统信息可以不包括传统的系统信息所包括的小区的公共配置信息等内容,而只是包括定位相关的信息(例如定位信息),这样可以减小第一类型的系统信息的容量,节省传输开销,也降低了UE的代码复杂度,进而节省了UE的存储空间,最终UE以较低的功耗能够实现定位,延长了UE的使用寿命。In the embodiment of the present application, the positioning information used to configure the uplink reference signal may be included in the system information, the UE can obtain the positioning information by receiving the system information, and the UE can send the uplink reference signal to the access network device after obtaining the positioning information , without completing random access, or in other words, the UE can send an uplink reference signal to the access network device without performing random access, so that the network can locate the UE. Through the solution provided by the embodiment of the present application, the communication procedures such as random access that the UE originally needs to perform before being positioned are reduced, and the positioning process can be simplified. Moreover, since the communication process that the UE needs to execute is reduced, there is no need to insert random access-related codes inside the UE, thereby reducing the storage space of the UE, thereby saving the power consumption of the UE. In addition, the system information including positioning information is the first type. For example, the first type of system information may not include the public configuration information of the cell included in the traditional system information, but only includes positioning-related information (such as positioning information ), which can reduce the capacity of the first type of system information, save transmission overhead, and also reduce the code complexity of the UE, thereby saving the storage space of the UE. Finally, the UE can achieve positioning with lower power consumption, extending the UE lifetime.
为了解决同样的技术问题,接下来本申请实施例提供第三种通信方法,通过该方法能够进一步节省定位过程中的步骤,节省UE的功耗。请参考图10,为该方法的流程图。In order to solve the same technical problem, the embodiment of the present application provides a third communication method, through which the steps in the positioning process can be further saved, and the power consumption of the UE can be saved. Please refer to FIG. 10 , which is a flowchart of the method.
S1001、接入网设备发送下行广播信道。相应的,UE从接入网设备接收下行广播信道。S1001. The access network device sends a downlink broadcast channel. Correspondingly, the UE receives the downlink broadcast channel from the access network device.
该下行广播信道可包括下行控制信道的配置信息。例如该下行广播信道为物理广播信道(physical broadcast channel,PBCH),接入网设备例如在某个小区发送PBCH,因此该小区内可能有多个UE都能接收该PBCH,本申请实施例以所述UE为例。该接入网设备例如为该UE的服务基站。例如,接入网设备发送的是SSB,SSB包括PBCH。The downlink broadcast channel may include configuration information of the downlink control channel. For example, the downlink broadcast channel is a physical broadcast channel (physical broadcast channel, PBCH), and the access network equipment, for example, transmits the PBCH in a certain cell, so there may be multiple UEs in the cell that can receive the PBCH. Take UE as an example. The access network device is, for example, a serving base station of the UE. For example, what the access network device sends is the SSB, and the SSB includes the PBCH.
PBCH可承载MIB,MIB可包括当前小区的一些公共配置信息,例如MIB可配置系统帧号(system frame number,SFN),还可包括下行控制信道的配置信息等,该下行控制信道例如为PDCCH。另外,UE通过接收PBCH,可以获得与当前小区的下行时间同步。The PBCH can carry the MIB, and the MIB can include some public configuration information of the current cell, for example, the MIB can configure a system frame number (system frame number, SFN), and can also include configuration information of a downlink control channel, such as a PDCCH. In addition, the UE can obtain downlink time synchronization with the current cell by receiving the PBCH.
S1002、接入网设备发送下行控制信道。相应的,UE从接入网设备接收下行控制信道。该下行控制信道例如为PDCCH。S1002. The access network device sends a downlink control channel. Correspondingly, the UE receives the downlink control channel from the access network device. The downlink control channel is, for example, PDCCH.
MIB包括PDCCH的配置信息,PDCCH的配置信息例如包括PDCCH的时域信息和/或频域信息等,UE根据PDCCH的配置信息就可以检测PDCCH。该PDCCH可调度PDSCH,或者说,该PDCCH承载的DCI能够调度PDSCH。The MIB includes configuration information of the PDCCH. The configuration information of the PDCCH includes, for example, time domain information and/or frequency domain information of the PDCCH. The UE can detect the PDCCH according to the configuration information of the PDCCH. The PDCCH can schedule the PDSCH, or in other words, the DCI carried by the PDCCH can schedule the PDSCH.
该PDCCH还可以承载定位信息,例如定位信息可包括在该DCI中,例如通过DCI内的预留空间来承载该定位信息。该定位信息可包括用于配置上行参考信号的信息,用于配置上行参考信号的信息例如称为第一配置信息。例如,定位信息仅包括第一配置信息,此时定位信息和第一配置信息可以是同一概念;或者,定位信息除了包括第一配置信息外还包括其他的用于实现定位功能的信息。关于定位信息的介绍,可参考图3所示的实施例中的S302。也就是说在本申请实施例中,定位信息通过PDCCH承载,UE无需接收系统信息就能获得定位信息,从而对于只需定位的UE(或者对功耗和/或时延要求较高的UE,或者对通信要求不高的UE)来说,甚至连系统信息都可以不必接收,根据定位信息就能向接入网设备发送上行参考信号,从而执行定位流程,进一步减少了定位流程中需要执行的步骤,节省了信令开销,也减小了UE的功耗。The PDCCH may also carry positioning information, for example, the positioning information may be included in the DCI, for example, the positioning information may be carried through a reserved space in the DCI. The positioning information may include information for configuring an uplink reference signal, and the information for configuring an uplink reference signal is called first configuration information, for example. For example, the positioning information only includes the first configuration information, and at this time the positioning information and the first configuration information may be the same concept; or, the positioning information includes other information for realizing the positioning function in addition to the first configuration information. For the introduction of positioning information, refer to S302 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 . That is to say, in the embodiment of the present application, the positioning information is carried by the PDCCH, and the UE can obtain the positioning information without receiving system information. Or for UEs with low communication requirements, even the system information does not need to be received, and the uplink reference signal can be sent to the access network device according to the positioning information, so as to perform the positioning process, further reducing the need to perform in the positioning process steps, saving signaling overhead and reducing UE power consumption.
可选的,该PDCCH还可以承载调度信息,该调度信息可用于调度(或者,配置)上行信道。例如,调度信息可包括在定位信息中,例如调度信息包括在第一配置信息中,或者调度信息包括在定位信息中但是不包括在第一配置信息中;又例如,调度信息不包括在定位信息中,但是包括在DCI中,即,DCI除了包括定位信息外,还包括调度信息。该上行信道例如包括上行控制信道和/或上行共享信道。Optionally, the PDCCH may also carry scheduling information, and the scheduling information may be used to schedule (or configure) uplink channels. For example, the scheduling information may be included in the positioning information, for example, the scheduling information is included in the first configuration information, or the scheduling information is included in the positioning information but not included in the first configuration information; for another example, the scheduling information is not included in the positioning information , but included in the DCI, that is, the DCI also includes scheduling information in addition to positioning information. The uplink channel includes, for example, an uplink control channel and/or an uplink shared channel.
本申请实施例中的PDCCH可承载定位信息,此类PDCCH可认为是第一类型的PDCCH,例如第一类型的PDCCH是定位专用的PDCCH。而除此之外,接入网设备还可能发送第二类型的PDCCH,例如第二类型的PDCCH是普通的PDCCH,第二类型的PDCCH可能并不承载定位信息。因此对于UE来说,可以识别PDCCH的类型,从而接收所需的PDCCH。要使得UE能够识别PDCCH,接入网设备可以进行相应的指示。The PDCCH in the embodiment of the present application may carry positioning information, and this type of PDCCH may be regarded as a first-type PDCCH, for example, the first-type PDCCH is a positioning-specific PDCCH. In addition, the access network device may also send the second type of PDCCH, for example, the second type of PDCCH is a common PDCCH, and the second type of PDCCH may not carry positioning information. Therefore, for the UE, the type of the PDCCH can be identified, so as to receive the required PDCCH. To enable the UE to identify the PDCCH, the access network device can make a corresponding instruction.
作为一种可选的指示方式,可通过PBCH进行指示。例如,PBCH可指示PDCCH的类型为第一类型或第二类型。目前的MIB中仍然有预留比特并未使用,因此可以考虑通过该预留比特来指示PDCCH的类型。例如通过MIB中的一个预留比特来指示PDCCH的类型,如果该比特的取值为“0”,表明PDCCH的类型为第二类型;如果该比特的取值为“1”,表明PDCCH的类型为第一类型。UE在接收MIB后,根据MIB的指示就能确定接入网设备即将发送的PDCCH的类型,对于本申请实施例的UE(例如需要定位的UE,或者对时延和/或功耗要求较高的UE,或者对通信要求不高的UE等)来说,如果MIB指示PDCCH的类型为第一类型,UE就可以检测PDCCH,而如果MIB指示PDCCH的类型为第二类型,UE就不必检测PDCCH,从而节省了UE的功耗。对于普通UE(例如无需定位的UE,或者虽然需要定位但是对功耗和/或时延要求不高的UE,或者对通信有一定要求的UE等)来说,如果MIB指示PDCCH的类型为第二类型,UE就可以检测PDCCH,而如果MIB指示PDCCH的类型为第一类型,UE就不必检测PDCCH,从而也节省了这些UE的功耗。As an optional indication manner, the indication can be performed through the PBCH. For example, the PBCH may indicate that the type of the PDCCH is the first type or the second type. There are still unused reserved bits in the current MIB, so it may be considered to use the reserved bits to indicate the type of the PDCCH. For example, the type of PDCCH is indicated by a reserved bit in the MIB. If the value of this bit is "0", it indicates that the type of PDCCH is the second type; if the value of this bit is "1", it indicates the type of PDCCH for the first type. After receiving the MIB, the UE can determine the type of PDCCH to be sent by the access network device according to the indication of the MIB. For the UE in the embodiment of this application (for example, the UE that needs to be positioned, or has high requirements for delay and/or power consumption For UEs, or UEs with low communication requirements, etc.), if the MIB indicates that the PDCCH type is the first type, the UE can detect the PDCCH, and if the MIB indicates that the PDCCH type is the second type, the UE does not need to detect the PDCCH , thereby saving the power consumption of the UE. For ordinary UEs (such as UEs that do not need positioning, or UEs that require positioning but do not require high power consumption and/or delay, or UEs that have certain requirements for communication, etc.), if the MIB indicates that the PDCCH type is the second Type 2, the UE can detect the PDCCH, and if the MIB indicates that the type of the PDCCH is the first type, the UE does not need to detect the PDCCH, thereby saving the power consumption of these UEs.
作为另一种可选的实施方式,可通过PDCCH进行指示。例如,如果PDCCH(或者说,DCI)的加扰序列为第一序列,则指示PDCCH的类型为第一类型,或者,指示PDCCH承载了定位信息;如果PDCCH(或者说,DCI)的加扰序列为第二序列,则指示PDCCH的类型为第二类型,或者,指示PDCCH未承载定位信息。第一序列例如为新定义的加扰序列,例如称为定位(POS)-SI-RNTI,第二序列例如为SI-RNTI。UE接收PDCCH后,根据用于加扰PDCCH(或,DCI)的加扰序列,就能确定该PDCCH是否是该UE需要的PDCCH。例如,对于本申请实施例的UE(例如需要定位的UE,或者对时延和/或功耗要求较高的UE,或者对通信要求不高的UE等)来说,如果PDCCH的加扰序列为第一序列,UE就可以对PDCCH(或,DCI)进行进一步处理,例如进行解码等处理,而如果PDCCH的加扰序列为第二序列,UE就不必对该PDCCH进行进一步处理,例如UE可丢弃该PDCCH,从而减少了UE的处理步骤,节省了UE的功耗。对于普通UE(例如无需定位的UE,或者虽然需要定位但是对功耗和/或时延要求不高的UE,或者对通信有一定要求的UE等)来说,如果PDCCH的加扰序列为第二序列,UE就可以对PDCCH(或,DCI)进行进一步处理,例如进行解码等处理,而如果PDCCH的加扰序列为第二序列,UE就不必对该PDCCH进行进一步处理,例如UE可丢弃该PDCCH,从而减少了UE的处理步骤,节省了UE的功耗。As another optional implementation manner, the indication may be performed through the PDCCH. For example, if the scrambling sequence of the PDCCH (or DCI) is the first sequence, it indicates that the type of the PDCCH is the first type, or indicates that the PDCCH carries positioning information; if the scrambling sequence of the PDCCH (or DCI) If it is the second sequence, it indicates that the type of the PDCCH is the second type, or indicates that the PDCCH does not carry positioning information. The first sequence is, for example, a newly defined scrambling sequence, for example called positioning (POS)-SI-RNTI, and the second sequence is, for example, SI-RNTI. After receiving the PDCCH, the UE can determine whether the PDCCH is the PDCCH required by the UE according to the scrambling sequence used to scramble the PDCCH (or DCI). For example, for a UE in this embodiment of the present application (such as a UE that needs positioning, or a UE that requires high delay and/or power consumption, or a UE that does not require high communication, etc.), if the scrambling sequence of the PDCCH If it is the first sequence, the UE can further process the PDCCH (or DCI), such as decoding and other processing, and if the scrambling sequence of the PDCCH is the second sequence, the UE does not need to perform further processing on the PDCCH, for example, the UE can The PDCCH is discarded, thereby reducing the processing steps of the UE and saving the power consumption of the UE. For ordinary UEs (such as UEs that do not need positioning, or UEs that require positioning but do not require high power consumption and/or delay, or UEs that have certain requirements for communication, etc.), if the scrambling sequence of the PDCCH is the first If the scrambling sequence of the PDCCH is the second sequence, the UE does not need to perform further processing on the PDCCH, for example, the UE can discard the PDCCH, thereby reducing the processing steps of the UE and saving the power consumption of the UE.
或者,除了如上方式外,接入网设备还可以通过其他方式来指示PDCCH是否承载定位信息,UE也可以相应通过其他方式来识别PDCCH,本申请实施例对此不做限制。Alternatively, in addition to the above methods, the access network device may also indicate whether the PDCCH carries positioning information in other ways, and the UE may also identify the PDCCH in other ways accordingly, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
S1003、UE根据定位信息,向接入网设备发送上行参考信号。相应的,接入网设备也可以根据定位信息从UE接收上行参考信号。S1003. The UE sends an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information. Correspondingly, the access network device may also receive the uplink reference signal from the UE according to the positioning information.
UE通过PDCCH已经获得了定位信息,则UE根据定位信息就可以向接入网设备发送上行参考信号,该上行参考信号可用于定位,例如用于对该UE定位。接入网设备接收该上行参考信号后,可对该上行参考信号进行测量,并将测量结果发送给LMF,从而LMF 可根据测量结果对该UE进行定位。也就是说,UE通过PDCCH就获得了定位信息,从而UE不仅无需进行随机接入,甚至无需接收SIB等系统信息就能实现定位,减少了UE在被定位前原本需要执行的接收SIB等系统信息以及随机接入等通信流程,能够简化定位过程。而且由于减少了终端设备需要执行的通信流程,则无需在终端设备内部置入随机接入相关的代码,由此能够减小终端设备的存储空间,从而节省终端设备的功耗。另外,对于某些场景,例如资产盘点、物流跟踪、电子围栏等场景,对于定位的功耗有较高的需求,例如需维持6到18个月的使用寿命,而这些场景对通信的需求远远小于对定位的需求。因此如果将本申请实施例的技术方案应用于这些场景,则UE由于无需执行随机接入等通信流程,可以有助于维持较长的使用寿命。After the UE has obtained the positioning information through the PDCCH, the UE can send an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information, and the uplink reference signal can be used for positioning, for example, for positioning the UE. After receiving the uplink reference signal, the access network device can measure the uplink reference signal and send the measurement result to the LMF, so that the LMF can locate the UE according to the measurement result. That is to say, the UE obtains positioning information through the PDCCH, so that the UE not only does not need to perform random access, but also can achieve positioning without receiving system information such as SIB, which reduces the need for the UE to receive system information such as SIB before being positioned. And random access and other communication processes can simplify the positioning process. Moreover, since the communication process that the terminal device needs to execute is reduced, there is no need to insert random access-related codes inside the terminal device, thereby reducing the storage space of the terminal device, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal device. In addition, for some scenarios, such as asset inventory, logistics tracking, electronic fence and other scenarios, there is a high demand for positioning power consumption, for example, the service life of 6 to 18 months needs to be maintained, and these scenarios require far more communication. Far less than the need for positioning. Therefore, if the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application are applied to these scenarios, since the UE does not need to perform communication procedures such as random access, it can help maintain a longer service life.
为了更好地理解本申请实施例的技术方案,下面介绍本申请实施例提供的第四种通信方法,该方法可看做是图10所示的实施例的一种可选的实施方式。请参考图11,为该方法的流程图。In order to better understand the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application, the fourth communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application is introduced below, which can be regarded as an optional implementation manner of the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 . Please refer to FIG. 11 , which is a flowchart of the method.
S1101、接入网设备发送PBCH。相应的,UE从接入网设备接收PBCH。S1101. The access network device sends the PBCH. Correspondingly, the UE receives the PBCH from the access network device.
S1101与图10所示的实施例中的S1001可以是同一步骤,更多内容可参考S1001的介绍。S1101 may be the same step as S1001 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 , and for more details, refer to the introduction of S1001 .
S1102、接入网设备发送下行控制信道。相应的,UE从接入网设备接收下行控制信道。该下行控制信道例如为PDCCH。S1102. The access network device sends a downlink control channel. Correspondingly, the UE receives the downlink control channel from the access network device. The downlink control channel is, for example, PDCCH.
S1102与图10所示的实施例中的S1002可以是同一步骤,更多内容可参考S1002的介绍。S1102 may be the same step as S1002 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 , and for more details, refer to the introduction of S1002.
S1103、UE向接入网设备发送该UE的标识。相应的,接入网设备从UE接收该UE的标识。S1103. The UE sends the identifier of the UE to the access network device. Correspondingly, the access network device receives the identifier of the UE from the UE.
本申请实施例中UE并不进行随机接入,如果UE直接请求定位或者直接发送上行参考信号,可能网络无法识别UE的身份。因此UE可以将该UE的标识发送给接入网设备,使得网络能够明确UE的身份,从而对该UE进行定位。UE的标识例如为UE的身份号(ID),UE ID例如为序列号,该序列号用于唯一标识该UE。UE的标识可以是在UE出厂时配置好,固化在UE的芯片内部,或者也可以是由其他设备为UE分配的编号,例如是接入网设备或核心网设备为UE分配的编号。总之,UE的标识与UE相关联。In the embodiment of the present application, the UE does not perform random access. If the UE directly requests positioning or directly sends an uplink reference signal, the network may not be able to identify the identity of the UE. Therefore, the UE can send the identity of the UE to the access network device, so that the network can clarify the identity of the UE, so as to locate the UE. The identifier of the UE is, for example, an identity number (ID) of the UE, and the UE ID is, for example, a serial number, which is used to uniquely identify the UE. The UE ID can be configured when the UE leaves the factory and fixed inside the UE's chip, or it can also be a number assigned to the UE by other devices, such as the number assigned to the UE by access network equipment or core network equipment. In summary, an identity of a UE is associated with the UE.
例如PDCCH承载了调度信息,则UE可在该调度信息所调度(或,配置)的上行信道上向接入网设备发送该UE的标识。该上行信道例如包括上行控制信道和/或上行共享信道。关于UE通过该上行信道向接入网设备发送该UE的标识的方式等内容,可参考图4所示的实施例中的S404。For example, the PDCCH carries scheduling information, and the UE may send the identifier of the UE to the access network device on the uplink channel scheduled (or configured) by the scheduling information. The uplink channel includes, for example, an uplink control channel and/or an uplink shared channel. For content such as the manner in which the UE sends the UE's identity to the access network device through the uplink channel, reference may be made to S404 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 .
还有可能,UE直接向接入网设备发送上行参考信号,而不发送该UE的标识,因此S1103为可选的步骤。It is also possible that the UE directly sends the uplink reference signal to the access network device without sending the identity of the UE, so S1103 is an optional step.
S1104、UE根据定位信息,向接入网设备发送上行参考信号。相应的,接入网设备也可以根据定位信息从UE接收上行参考信号。S1104. The UE sends an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information. Correspondingly, the access network device may also receive the uplink reference signal from the UE according to the positioning information.
UE通过定位信息获得了该上行参考信号的相应信息,例如获得了该上行参考信号的带宽等信息,则UE可根据获得的信息向接入网设备发送上行参考信号。The UE obtains the corresponding information of the uplink reference signal through the positioning information, for example, obtains information such as the bandwidth of the uplink reference signal, and then the UE may send the uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the obtained information.
可选的,上行参考信号可以是根据UE的标识确定的,或者说,UE根据UE的标识可确定上行参考信号,或者说,UE的标识可用于确定上行参考信号。关于根据UE的标识确定上行参考信号的方式,例如上行参考信号的序列标识可根据UE的标识确定,和/或,上 行参考信号的时域位置和/或频域位置可根据UE的标识确定,等等内容,可参考图4所示的实施例中的S405。Optionally, the uplink reference signal may be determined according to the identity of the UE, or in other words, the UE may determine the uplink reference signal according to the identity of the UE, or in other words, the identity of the UE may be used to determine the uplink reference signal. Regarding the manner of determining the uplink reference signal according to the identity of the UE, for example, the sequence identity of the uplink reference signal may be determined according to the identity of the UE, and/or the time domain position and/or frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal may be determined according to the identity of the UE, For content and so on, refer to S405 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 .
S1104与图10所示的实施例中的S1003可以是同一步骤。S1104 may be the same step as S1003 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 .
S1105、接入网设备向AMF发送第一定位请求。相应的,AMF从接入网设备接收第一定位请求。第一定位请求可请求对UE进行定位,例如第一定位请求包括该UE的标识。S1105. The access network device sends a first positioning request to the AMF. Correspondingly, the AMF receives the first positioning request from the access network device. The first positioning request may request to locate the UE, for example, the first positioning request includes the identifier of the UE.
关于S1105的更多内容,可参考图4所示的实施例中的S406。For more details about S1105, refer to S406 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 .
S1106、AMF向LMF发送第二定位请求。相应的,LMF从AMF接收第二定位请求。例如第二定位请求包括UE的标识。S1106. The AMF sends a second positioning request to the LMF. Correspondingly, the LMF receives the second positioning request from the AMF. For example, the second positioning request includes the identifier of the UE.
需要注意的是,S1106中第二定位请求包括的UE的标识,与前述各个步骤中的UE的标识,可以相同也可以不同。为了加以区分,将前述S1101~S1105所涉及的UE的标识称为第一标识,将S1106中AMF发送给LMF的UE的标识称为第二标识。关于这部分内容,以及S1106的更多内容,可参考图4所示的实施例中的S407。It should be noted that the identifier of the UE included in the second positioning request in S1106 may be the same as or different from the identifier of the UE in the preceding steps. In order to distinguish, the UE identity involved in S1101-S1105 is called the first identity, and the UE identity sent by the AMF to the LMF in S1106 is called the second identity. For this part of the content and more content of S1106, refer to S407 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 .
S1107、LMF向接入网设备发送第一请求消息。相应的,接入网设备从LMF接收第一请求消息。第一请求消息用于请求获取用于配置上行参考信号的信息。S1107. The LMF sends a first request message to the access network device. Correspondingly, the access network device receives the first request message from the LMF. The first request message is used to request to obtain information for configuring the uplink reference signal.
S1108、接入网设备向LMF发送定位响应消息。相应的,LMF从接入网设备接收定位响应消息。第一响应消息可包括用于配置上行参考信号的信息,例如第一响应消息包括定位信息或第一配置信息。S1108. The access network device sends a location response message to the LMF. Correspondingly, the LMF receives a location response message from the access network device. The first response message may include information for configuring the uplink reference signal, for example, the first response message includes positioning information or first configuration information.
S1109、LMF向多个接入网设备发送测量请求。相应的,多个接入网设备从LMF接收测量请求。多个接入网设备例如包括所述接入网设备,则S1109以所述接入网设备从LMF接收测量请求为例。S1109. The LMF sends measurement requests to multiple access network devices. Correspondingly, multiple access network devices receive measurement requests from the LMF. For example, multiple access network devices include the access network device, and S1109 takes the access network device receiving a measurement request from the LMF as an example.
关于S1109的更多内容,可参考图4所示的实施例中的S410。For more details about S1109, refer to S410 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 .
S1110、接入网设备向LMF发送测量结果。相应的,LMF从接入网设备接收测量结果。S1110. The access network device sends the measurement result to the LMF. Correspondingly, the LMF receives the measurement result from the access network device.
关于S1110的更多内容,可参考图4所示的实施例中的S411。For more details about S1110, refer to S411 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 .
S1111、LMF根据测量结果确定UE的位置。S1111. The LMF determines the location of the UE according to the measurement result.
LMF例如从多个接入网设备接收了多个测量结果,则LMF可根据多个测量结果确定UE的位置。关于LMF确定UE的位置的方式,可参考图1A所示的流程中的S116的介绍。For example, the LMF has received multiple measurement results from multiple access network devices, and the LMF can determine the location of the UE according to the multiple measurement results. Regarding the manner in which the LMF determines the location of the UE, reference may be made to the introduction of S116 in the process shown in FIG. 1A .
其中,S1105~S1111均为可选的步骤,例如接入网设备从UE接收上行参考信号后,网络还可以采用其他方式对UE进行定位。Wherein, S1105-S1111 are all optional steps. For example, after the access network device receives the uplink reference signal from the UE, the network may also use other methods to locate the UE.
本申请实施例中,UE通过PDCCH就获得了定位信息,从而UE不仅无需进行随机接入,甚至无需接收SIB等系统信息就能实现定位,减少了UE在被定位前原本需要执行的接收SIB等系统信息以及随机接入等通信流程,能够简化定位过程。而且由于减少了终端设备需要执行的通信流程,则无需在终端设备内部置入随机接入相关的代码,由此能够减小终端设备的存储空间,从而节省终端设备的功耗。对于某些场景,例如资产盘点、物流跟踪、电子围栏等场景,对于定位的功耗有较高的需求,例如需维持6到18个月的使用寿命,而这些场景对通信的需求远远小于对定位的需求。因此如果将本申请实施例的技术方案应用于这些场景,则UE由于无需执行随机接入等通信流程,可以有助于维持较长的使用寿命。In the embodiment of the present application, the UE obtains the positioning information through the PDCCH, so that the UE not only does not need to perform random access, but also can realize positioning without receiving system information such as SIB, which reduces the need for the UE to perform before being positioned. Communication processes such as system information and random access can simplify the positioning process. Moreover, since the communication process that the terminal device needs to execute is reduced, there is no need to insert random access-related codes inside the terminal device, thereby reducing the storage space of the terminal device, thereby saving the power consumption of the terminal device. For some scenarios, such as asset inventory, logistics tracking, electronic fence and other scenarios, there is a high demand for positioning power consumption, such as the need to maintain a service life of 6 to 18 months, and these scenarios have far less demand for communication than The need for positioning. Therefore, if the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application are applied to these scenarios, since the UE does not need to perform communication procedures such as random access, it can help maintain a longer service life.
另外,如果UE在向接入网设备发送该UE的标识时是在上行控制信道上发送,则对于该UE来说,由于并不需要发送控制信道也不需要接收控制信道,因此只需支持控制信道编码(例如极化码(polar))即可,而无需支持共享信道编码(例如低密度奇偶校验码 (low density parity check Code,LDPC)),这使得UE只需实现极少的协议功能就能进行工作,将进一步简化UE的代码实现,也意味着存储空间的进一步减小,最终使得UE实现更低的功耗以及更长的使用寿命。In addition, if the UE sends the UE identity to the access network equipment on the uplink control channel, since the UE does not need to send or receive the control channel, it only needs to support the control channel. Channel coding (such as polar code (polar)) is enough, without supporting shared channel coding (such as low density parity check code (low density parity check Code, LDPC)), which makes UE only need to implement very few protocol functions It will be able to work, which will further simplify the code implementation of the UE, which also means that the storage space will be further reduced, and finally enable the UE to achieve lower power consumption and longer service life.
图12给出了本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图。所述通信装置1200可以是图3所示的实施例、图4所示的实施例、图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例所述的终端设备或该终端设备的电路系统,用于实现上述方法实施例中对应于终端设备的方法。或者,所述通信装置1200可以是图3所示的实施例、图4所示的实施例、图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例所述的接入网设备或该接入网设备的电路系统,用于实现上述方法实施例中对应于接入网设备的方法。具体的功能可以参见上述方法实施例中的说明。其中,例如一种电路系统为芯片系统。FIG. 12 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 1200 may be the terminal device or the circuit system of the terminal device described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 , the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 , the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 11 , for implementing the method corresponding to the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment. Alternatively, the communication device 1200 may be the access network device or the access network device described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 , the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 , the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the embodiment shown in FIG. The circuit system of the network access device is used to implement the method corresponding to the access network device in the foregoing method embodiments. For specific functions, refer to the descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments. Wherein, for example, a circuit system is a chip system.
该通信装置1200包括至少一个处理器1201。处理器1201可以用于装置的内部处理,实现一定的控制处理功能。可选地,处理器1201包括指令。可选地,处理器1201可以存储数据。可选地,不同的处理器可以是独立的器件,可以位于不同物理位置,可以位于不同的集成电路上。可选地,不同的处理器可以集成在一个或多个处理器中,例如,集成在一个或多个集成电路上。The communication device 1200 includes at least one processor 1201 . The processor 1201 can be used for internal processing of the device to realize certain control processing functions. Optionally, processor 1201 includes instructions. Optionally, processor 1201 may store data. Alternatively, different processors may be separate devices, may be located in different physical locations, and may be located on different integrated circuits. Alternatively, different processors may be integrated within one or more processors, eg, on one or more integrated circuits.
可选地,通信装置1200包括一个或多个存储器1203,用以存储指令。可选地,所述存储器1203中还可以存储有数据。所述处理器和存储器可以单独设置,也可以集成在一起。Optionally, the communication device 1200 includes one or more memories 1203 for storing instructions. Optionally, data may also be stored in the memory 1203 . The processor and memory can be set separately or integrated together.
可选地,通信装置1200包括通信线路1202,以及至少一个通信接口1204。其中,因为存储器1203、通信线路1202以及通信接口1204均为可选项,因此在图12中均以虚线表示。Optionally, the communication device 1200 includes a communication line 1202 and at least one communication interface 1204 . Wherein, since the memory 1203, the communication line 1202 and the communication interface 1204 are all optional, they are all indicated by dotted lines in FIG. 12 .
可选地,通信装置1200还可以包括收发器和/或天线。其中,收发器可以用于向其他装置发送信息或从其他装置接收信息。所述收发器可以称为收发机、收发电路、输入输出接口等,用于通过天线实现通信装置1200的收发功能。可选地,收发器包括发射机(transmitter)和接收机(receiver)。示例性地,发射机可以用于将基带信号生成射频(radio frequency)信号,接收机可以用于将射频信号转换为基带信号。Optionally, the communication device 1200 may further include a transceiver and/or an antenna. Among other things, a transceiver may be used to send information to or receive information from other devices. The transceiver may be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, an input-output interface, etc., and is used to realize the transceiver function of the communication device 1200 through an antenna. Optionally, the transceiver includes a transmitter (transmitter) and a receiver (receiver). Exemplarily, the transmitter can be used to generate a radio frequency (radio frequency) signal from a baseband signal, and the receiver can be used to convert the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal.
处理器1201可以包括一个通用中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU),微处理器,特定应用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC),或一个或多个用于控制本申请方案程序执行的集成电路。The processor 1201 may include a general-purpose central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), a microprocessor, a specific application integrated circuit (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), or one or more integrated circuits for controlling the program execution of the application program. circuit.
通信线路1202可包括一通路,在上述组件之间传送信息。Communication line 1202 may include a pathway for communicating information between the above-described components.
通信接口1204,使用任何收发器一类的装置,用于与其他设备或通信网络通信,如以太网,无线接入网(radio access network,RAN),无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN),有线接入网等。 Communication interface 1204, using any device such as a transceiver for communicating with other devices or communication networks, such as Ethernet, radio access network (radio access network, RAN), wireless local area networks (wireless local area networks, WLAN), Wired access network, etc.
存储器1203可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)或者可存储信息和指令的其他类型的动态存储设备,也可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read-only memory,EEPROM)、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory,CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质,但不限于 此。存储器1203可以是独立存在,通过通信线路1202与处理器1201相连接。或者,存储器1203也可以和处理器1201集成在一起。The memory 1203 may be a read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (random access memory, RAM) or other types that can store information and instructions It can also be an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM) or other optical disc storage, optical disc storage (including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and can be programmed by a computer Any other medium accessed, but not limited to. The memory 1203 may exist independently, and is connected to the processor 1201 through the communication line 1202 . Alternatively, the memory 1203 may also be integrated with the processor 1201 .
其中,存储器1203用于存储执行本申请方案的计算机执行指令,并由处理器1201来控制执行。处理器1201用于执行存储器1203中存储的计算机执行指令,从而实现本申请上述实施例提供的通信方法。Wherein, the memory 1203 is used to store computer-executed instructions for implementing the solution of the present application, and the execution is controlled by the processor 1201 . The processor 1201 is configured to execute computer-executed instructions stored in the memory 1203, so as to implement the communication methods provided in the above-mentioned embodiments of the present application.
可选的,本申请实施例中的计算机执行指令也可以称之为应用程序代码,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。Optionally, the computer-executed instructions in the embodiments of the present application may also be referred to as application program codes, which is not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
在具体实现中,作为一种实施例,处理器1201可以包括一个或多个CPU,例如图12中的CPU0和CPU1。In a specific implementation, as an embodiment, the processor 1201 may include one or more CPUs, for example, CPU0 and CPU1 in FIG. 12 .
在具体实现中,作为一种实施例,通信装置1200可以包括多个处理器,例如图12中的处理器1201和处理器1208。这些处理器中的每一个可以是一个单核(single-CPU)处理器,也可以是一个多核(multi-CPU)处理器。这里的处理器可以指一个或多个设备、电路、和/或用于处理数据(例如计算机程序指令)的处理核。In a specific implementation, as an embodiment, the communication device 1200 may include multiple processors, for example, the processor 1201 and the processor 1208 in FIG. 12 . Each of these processors may be a single-core (single-CPU) processor or a multi-core (multi-CPU) processor. A processor herein may refer to one or more devices, circuits, and/or processing cores for processing data (eg, computer program instructions).
当图12所示的装置为芯片时,例如是接入网设备的芯片,或UPF的芯片,或SMF的芯片,或终端设备的芯片,则该芯片包括处理器1201(还可以包括处理器1208)、通信线路1202、存储器1203和通信接口1204。具体地,通信接口1204可以是输入接口、管脚或电路等。存储器1203可以是寄存器、缓存等。处理器1201和处理器1208可以是一个通用的CPU,微处理器,ASIC,或一个或多个用于控制上述任一实施例的通信方法的程序执行的集成电路。When the apparatus shown in FIG. 12 is a chip, such as a chip of an access network device, or a chip of a UPF, or a chip of an SMF, or a chip of a terminal device, the chip includes a processor 1201 (may also include a processor 1208 ), communication line 1202, memory 1203 and communication interface 1204. Specifically, the communication interface 1204 may be an input interface, a pin, or a circuit. The memory 1203 may be a register, a cache, and the like. The processor 1201 and the processor 1208 may be a general-purpose CPU, a microprocessor, an ASIC, or one or more integrated circuits for controlling program execution of the communication method of any of the above-mentioned embodiments.
在第一种实现方式中,该通信装置1200可以用于实现上述申请实施例中对应于终端设备的方法,具体功能参见上述实施例中的说明。In a first implementation manner, the communication apparatus 1200 may be used to implement the method corresponding to the terminal device in the above embodiment of the application, and for specific functions, refer to the description in the above embodiment.
示例性地,通信装置1200包括处理器1201,所述处理器1201用于执行计算机程序或指令,使得上述申请实施例中对应于终端设备的方法被执行。例如,上述申请实施例中对应于终端设备的方法,包括:从接入网设备接收下行控制信道,所述下行控制信道用于调度系统信息,且所述下行控制信道还指示所述系统信息的类型为第一类型或第二类型,所述第一类型的系统信息包括定位信息,所述第二类型的系统信息不包括所述定位信息,所述定位信息包括用于配置上行参考信号的信息;如果所述下行控制信道指示所述系统信息的类型为所述第一类型,检测所述系统信息;根据所述定位信息,向所述接入网设备发送上行参考信号。Exemplarily, the communication apparatus 1200 includes a processor 1201, and the processor 1201 is configured to execute a computer program or an instruction, so that the method corresponding to the terminal device in the above application embodiment is executed. For example, the method corresponding to the terminal device in the above-mentioned application embodiment includes: receiving a downlink control channel from the access network device, the downlink control channel is used to schedule system information, and the downlink control channel also indicates the information of the system information The type is the first type or the second type, the system information of the first type includes positioning information, the system information of the second type does not include the positioning information, and the positioning information includes information for configuring uplink reference signals ; if the downlink control channel indicates that the type of the system information is the first type, detecting the system information; sending an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information.
又例如,上述申请实施例中对应于终端设备的方法,包括:接收下行广播信道,所述下行广播信道包括下行控制信道的配置信息;接收所述下行控制信道,所述下行控制信道承载定位信息,所述定位信息包括用于配置上行参考信号的信息;根据所述定位信息,向所述接入网设备发送上行参考信号。For another example, the method corresponding to the terminal device in the above-mentioned application embodiment includes: receiving a downlink broadcast channel, the downlink broadcast channel including configuration information of a downlink control channel; receiving the downlink control channel, the downlink control channel carrying positioning information , the positioning information includes information for configuring an uplink reference signal; and sending an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information.
在第二种实现方式中,该通信装置1200可以用于实现上述申请实施例中对应于接入网设备的方法,具体功能参见上述实施例中的说明。In the second implementation manner, the communication apparatus 1200 may be used to implement the method corresponding to the access network device in the above-mentioned application embodiment, and for specific functions, refer to the description in the above-mentioned embodiment.
示例性地,通信装置1200包括处理器1201,所述处理器1201用于执行计算机程序或指令,使得上述申请实施例中对应于接入网设备的方法被执行。例如,上述申请实施例中对应于接入网设备的方法,包括:发送下行控制信道,所述下行控制信道用于调度系统信息,且所述下行控制信道还指示所述系统信息的类型为第一类型或第二类型,所述第一类型的系统信息包括定位信息,所述第二类型的系统信息不包括所述定位信息,所述定位信 息包括用于配置上行参考信号的信息;发送所述系统信息;如果所述系统信息的类型为所述第一类型,从终端设备接收上行参考信号。Exemplarily, the communication apparatus 1200 includes a processor 1201, and the processor 1201 is configured to execute a computer program or an instruction, so that the method corresponding to the access network device in the above application embodiment is executed. For example, the method corresponding to the access network device in the above-mentioned application embodiment includes: sending a downlink control channel, the downlink control channel is used to schedule system information, and the downlink control channel also indicates that the type of the system information is the first One type or the second type, the system information of the first type includes positioning information, the system information of the second type does not include the positioning information, and the positioning information includes information for configuring uplink reference signals; sending the The system information; if the type of the system information is the first type, receive an uplink reference signal from the terminal device.
又例如,上述申请实施例中对应于接入网设备的方法,包括:发送下行广播信道,所述下行广播信道包括下行控制信道的配置信息;发送所述下行控制信道,所述下行控制信道承载定位信息,所述定位信息包括用于配置上行参考信号的信息;根据所述定位信息,从终端设备接收上行参考信号。For another example, the method corresponding to the access network device in the above-mentioned application embodiment includes: sending a downlink broadcast channel, where the downlink broadcast channel includes configuration information of a downlink control channel; sending the downlink control channel, where the downlink control channel carries Positioning information, where the positioning information includes information for configuring an uplink reference signal; according to the positioning information, an uplink reference signal is received from a terminal device.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对装置进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。比如,在采用对应各个功能划分各个功能模块的情况下,图13示出了一种装置示意图,该装置1300可以是上述各个方法实施例中所涉及的接入网设备或终端设备,或者为接入网设备中的芯片或终端设备中的芯片。该装置1300包括发送单元1301、处理单元1302和接收单元1303。The embodiment of the present application may divide the device into functional modules according to the above method example, for example, each functional module may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module. The above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software function modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiment of the present application is schematic, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation. For example, in the case of dividing each functional module corresponding to each function, FIG. 13 shows a schematic diagram of an apparatus. The apparatus 1300 may be the access network device or terminal device involved in the above method embodiments, or an access network device A chip in a network access device or a chip in a terminal device. The apparatus 1300 includes a sending unit 1301 , a processing unit 1302 and a receiving unit 1303 .
应理解,该装置1300可以用于实现本申请实施例的方法中由接入网设备或终端设备执行的步骤,相关特征可以参照上文的各个实施例,此处不再赘述。It should be understood that the apparatus 1300 may be used to implement the steps performed by the access network device or the terminal device in the method of the embodiment of the present application, and related features may refer to the above embodiments, and details are not repeated here.
可选的,图13中的发送单元1301、接收单元1303以及处理单元1302的功能/实现过程可以通过图12中的处理器1201调用存储器1203中存储的计算机执行指令来实现。或者,图13中的处理单元1302的功能/实现过程可以通过图12中的处理器1201调用存储器1203中存储的计算机执行指令来实现,图13中的发送单元1301和接收单元1303的功能/实现过程可以通过图12中的通信接口1204来实现。Optionally, the functions/implementation process of the sending unit 1301, the receiving unit 1303, and the processing unit 1302 in FIG. 13 may be implemented by the processor 1201 in FIG. 12 invoking computer-executed instructions stored in the memory 1203. Alternatively, the function/implementation process of the processing unit 1302 in FIG. 13 can be realized by calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 1203 by the processor 1201 in FIG. The process may be implemented through communication interface 1204 in FIG. 12 .
可选的,当该装置1300是芯片或电路时,则发送单元1301和接收单元1303的功能/实现过程还可以通过管脚或电路等来实现。Optionally, when the device 1300 is a chip or a circuit, the functions/implementation process of the sending unit 1301 and the receiving unit 1303 may also be implemented through pins or circuits.
本申请还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序或指令,当该计算机程序或指令被运行时,实现前述方法实施例中由接入网设备或终端设备所执行的方法。这样,上述实施例中所述功能可以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、ROM、RAM、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。The present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, where the computer-readable storage medium stores computer programs or instructions, and when the computer programs or instructions are executed, the above method embodiments performed by the access network device or the terminal device can be implemented. method of execution. In this way, the functions described in the above embodiments can be realized in the form of software function units and sold or used as independent products. Based on such an understanding, the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product in essence or the part that contributes to it or the part of the technical solution. The computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including several instructions for So that a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) executes all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. The storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, ROM, RAM, magnetic disk or optical disk and other various media that can store program codes.
本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序代码,当该计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行前述任一方法实施例中由终端设备或接入网设备所执行的方法。The present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product including: computer program code, when the computer program code is run on the computer, the computer is made to execute any of the preceding method embodiments by the terminal device or the access network device The method executed.
本申请还提供一种系统,其包括终端设备和接入网设备,或者,包括终端设备,接入网设备和定位服务器。The present application also provides a system, which includes a terminal device and an access network device, or, includes a terminal device, an access network device and a positioning server.
本申请实施例还提供了一种处理装置,包括处理器和接口;所述处理器用于执行上述任一方法实施例所涉及的终端设备或接入网设备所执行的方法。An embodiment of the present application further provides a processing apparatus, including a processor and an interface; the processor is configured to execute the method performed by the terminal device or the access network device involved in any one of the above method embodiments.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产 品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。In the above embodiments, all or part of them may be implemented by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application will be generated in whole or in part. The computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wired (eg, coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media. The available medium may be a magnetic medium (such as a floppy disk, a hard disk, or a magnetic tape), an optical medium (such as a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (such as a solid state disk (solid state disk, SSD)), etc.
本申请实施例中所描述的各种说明性的逻辑单元和电路可以通过通用处理器,数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC),现场可编程门阵列(field-programmable gate array,FPGA),或其它可编程逻辑装置,离散门或晶体管逻辑,离散硬件部件,或上述任何组合的设计来实现或操作所描述的功能。通用处理器可以为微处理器,可选地,该通用处理器也可以为任何传统的处理器、控制器、微控制器或状态机。处理器也可以通过计算装置的组合来实现,例如数字信号处理器和微处理器,多个微处理器,一个或多个微处理器联合一个数字信号处理器核,或任何其它类似的配置来实现。The various illustrative logic units and circuits described in the embodiments of the present application can be programmed through general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processors, DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (application specific integrated circuits, ASICs), field programmable A field-programmable gate array (FPGA), or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any combination thereof designed to implement or operate the described functions. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor, and optionally, the general-purpose processor may also be any conventional processor, controller, microcontroller or state machine. A processor may also be implemented by a combination of computing devices, such as a digital signal processor and a microprocessor, multiple microprocessors, one or more microprocessors combined with a digital signal processor core, or any other similar configuration to accomplish.
本申请实施例中所描述的方法或算法的步骤可以直接嵌入硬件、处理器执行的软件单元、或者这两者的结合。软件单元可以存储于RAM、闪存、ROM、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable programmable read-only memory,EPROM)、EEPROM、寄存器、硬盘、可移动磁盘、CD-ROM或本领域中其它任意形式的存储媒介中。示例性地,存储媒介可以与处理器连接,以使得处理器可以从存储媒介中读取信息,并可以向存储媒介存写信息。可选地,存储媒介还可以集成到处理器中。处理器和存储媒介可以设置于ASIC中,ASIC可以设置于终端设备中。可选地,处理器和存储媒介也可以设置于终端设备中的不同的部件中。The steps of the method or algorithm described in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embedded in hardware, a software unit executed by a processor, or a combination of both. The software unit may be stored in RAM, flash memory, ROM, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), EEPROM, registers, hard disk, removable disk, CD-ROM or any other form in the art in the storage medium. Exemplarily, the storage medium can be connected to the processor, so that the processor can read information from the storage medium, and can write information to the storage medium. Optionally, the storage medium can also be integrated into the processor. The processor and the storage medium can be set in the ASIC, and the ASIC can be set in the terminal device. Optionally, the processor and the storage medium may also be disposed in different components in the terminal device.
这些计算机程序指令也可装载到计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备上,使得在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行一系列操作步骤以产生计算机实现的处理,从而在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行的指令提供用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的步骤。These computer program instructions can also be loaded onto a computer or other programmable data processing device, causing a series of operational steps to be performed on the computer or other programmable device to produce a computer-implemented process, thereby The instructions provide steps for implementing the functions specified in the flow chart or blocks of the flowchart and/or the block or blocks of the block diagrams.
尽管结合具体特征及其实施例对本申请实施例进行了描述,显而易见的,在不脱离本申请实施例的范围的情况下,可对其进行各种修改和组合。相应地,本申请实施例和附图仅仅是所附权利要求所界定的本申请实施例的示例性说明,且视为已覆盖本申请实施例范围内的任意和所有修改、变化、组合或等同物。显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请实施例进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请实施例的范围。这样,倘若本申请实施例的这些修改和变型属于本申请实施例权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请实施例也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。Although the embodiments of the present application have been described in conjunction with specific features and embodiments thereof, it is obvious that various modifications and combinations can be made thereto without departing from the scope of the embodiments of the present application. Correspondingly, the embodiments of the present application and the drawings are only exemplary descriptions of the embodiments of the present application defined by the appended claims, and are deemed to have covered any and all modifications, changes, combinations or equivalents within the scope of the embodiments of the present application things. Apparently, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the embodiments of the present application without departing from the scope of the embodiments of the present application. In this way, if the modifications and variations of the embodiments of the present application fall within the scope of the claims of the embodiments of the present application and their equivalent technologies, the embodiments of the present application are also intended to include these modifications and variations.

Claims (35)

  1. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, characterized in that, comprising:
    从接入网设备接收下行控制信道,所述下行控制信道用于调度系统信息,且所述下行控制信道还指示所述系统信息的类型为第一类型或第二类型,所述第一类型的系统信息包括定位信息,所述第二类型的系统信息不包括所述定位信息,所述定位信息包括用于配置上行参考信号的信息;Receive a downlink control channel from an access network device, the downlink control channel is used to schedule system information, and the downlink control channel also indicates that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type, and the type of the first type is The system information includes positioning information, the second type of system information does not include the positioning information, and the positioning information includes information for configuring an uplink reference signal;
    如果所述下行控制信道指示所述系统信息的类型为所述第一类型,检测所述系统信息;If the downlink control channel indicates that the type of the system information is the first type, detecting the system information;
    根据所述定位信息,向所述接入网设备发送上行参考信号。Send an uplink reference signal to the access network device according to the positioning information.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述系统信息还包括用于评估所述终端设备是否允许接入小区的信息,和/或统一接入控制UAC信息。The method according to claim 1, wherein the system information further includes information for evaluating whether the terminal device is allowed to access a cell, and/or unified access control (UAC) information.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述下行控制信道还指示所述系统信息的类型为第一类型或第二类型,包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the downlink control channel further indicates that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type, including:
    所述下行控制信道承载下行控制信息,所述下行控制信息包括用于指示所述系统信息的类型为所述第一类型或所述第二类型的信息;或,The downlink control channel carries downlink control information, and the downlink control information includes information indicating that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type; or,
    所述下行控制信道的加扰序列为第一序列,用于指示所述系统信息的类型为所述第一类型,或,所述下行控制信道的加扰序列为第二序列,用于指示所述系统信息的类型为所述第二类型。The scrambling sequence of the downlink control channel is a first sequence, which is used to indicate that the type of the system information is the first type, or, the scrambling sequence of the downlink control channel is a second sequence, which is used to indicate the type of the system information The type of the system information is the second type.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 3, characterized in that the method further comprises:
    在所述系统信息所配置的上行信道上,发送终端设备的标识,所述上行信道包括上行控制信道或上行共享信道。The identifier of the terminal device is sent on the uplink channel configured by the system information, where the uplink channel includes an uplink control channel or an uplink shared channel.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 4, characterized in that,
    所述上行信道包括所述上行控制信道,所述上行控制信道用于请求定位;或,The uplink channel includes the uplink control channel, and the uplink control channel is used to request positioning; or,
    所述上行信道包括所述上行共享信道,所述方法还包括:向所述接入网设备发送请求信息,所述请求信息用于请求定位。The uplink channel includes the uplink shared channel, and the method further includes: sending request information to the access network device, where the request information is used to request positioning.
  6. 根据权利要求1~5任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述上行参考信号是根据终端设备的标识确定的。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, characterized in that the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identity of the terminal equipment.
  7. 根据权利要求1~6任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述上行参考信号是根据终端设备的标识和所述定位信息确定的。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identity of the terminal equipment and the positioning information.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述定位信息包括如下一项或多项:The method according to claim 7, wherein the positioning information includes one or more of the following:
    所述上行参考信号的带宽信息;bandwidth information of the uplink reference signal;
    所述上行参考信号的周期;the period of the uplink reference signal;
    所述上行参考信号占用的符号个数;或,The number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal; or,
    所述上行参考信号在频域的梳齿信息。Comb tooth information of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain.
  9. 根据权利要求6~8任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to any one of claims 6-8, characterized in that,
    所述上行参考信号的序列标识与所述终端设备的标识相同;或,The sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is the same as the identifier of the terminal device; or,
    所述上行参考信号的序列标识是对所述终端设备的标识取模得到的;或,The sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is obtained by moduloing the identifier of the terminal device; or,
    所述上行参考信号的序列标识是所述终端设备的标识的一部分。The sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is part of the identifier of the terminal device.
  10. 根据权利要求6~9任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述上行参考信号的时域位置和/或频域位置是根据所述终端设备的标识确定的。The method according to any one of claims 6-9, characterized in that the time-domain position and/or frequency-domain position of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述上行参考信号的时域位置包括所述上行参考信号所在的时隙,所述上行参考信号所在的时隙的编号是根据所述终端设备的标识确定的,所述上行参考信号所在的时隙的编号是所述上行参考信号所在的时隙在一个系统帧内的编号。The method according to claim 10, wherein the time domain position of the uplink reference signal includes the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located, and the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located is based on the The number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located is the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located in one system frame.
  12. 根据权利要求10或11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述上行参考信号的时域位置包括所述上行参考信号的起始符号,其中,所述上行参考信号的起始符号的编号是根据所述终端设备的标识和第一信息确定的,所述第一信息包括所述上行参考信号占用的符号个数和/或一个时隙包括的符号个数。The method according to claim 10 or 11, wherein the time domain position of the uplink reference signal includes a start symbol of the uplink reference signal, wherein the number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal is based on Determined by the identifier of the terminal device and first information, where the first information includes the number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal and/or the number of symbols included in a time slot.
  13. 根据权利要求10~12任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述上行参考信号的频域位置包括所述上行参考信号的频域起始位置,所述上行参考信号的频域起始位置所在的子载波的编号是根据所述终端设备的标识和所述上行参考信号在频域的梳齿信息确定的。The method according to any one of claims 10-12, wherein the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal includes a frequency domain start position of the uplink reference signal, and the frequency domain start position of the uplink reference signal is The number of the subcarrier where the position is located is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device and the comb information of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain.
  14. 根据权利要求1~13任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述上行参考信号为定位SRS。The method according to any one of claims 1-13, wherein the uplink reference signal is a positioning SRS.
  15. 根据权利要求1~14任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,终端设备仅用于定位。The method according to any one of claims 1-14, characterized in that the terminal device is only used for positioning.
  16. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, characterized in that, comprising:
    发送下行控制信道,所述下行控制信道用于调度系统信息,且所述下行控制信道还指示所述系统信息的类型为第一类型或第二类型,所述第一类型的系统信息包括定位信息,所述第二类型的系统信息不包括所述定位信息,所述定位信息包括用于配置上行参考信号的信息;Sending a downlink control channel, the downlink control channel is used to schedule system information, and the downlink control channel also indicates that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type, and the first type of system information includes positioning information , the second type of system information does not include the positioning information, and the positioning information includes information for configuring an uplink reference signal;
    发送所述系统信息;send said system information;
    如果所述系统信息的类型为所述第一类型,从终端设备接收上行参考信号。If the type of the system information is the first type, receive an uplink reference signal from the terminal device.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述系统信息还包括用于评估所述终端设备是否允许接入小区的信息,和/或统一接入控制UAC信息。The method according to claim 16, wherein the system information further includes information for evaluating whether the terminal device is allowed to access a cell, and/or unified access control (UAC) information.
  18. 根据权利要求16或17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述下行控制信道还指示所述系统信息的类型为第一类型或第二类型,包括:The method according to claim 16 or 17, wherein the downlink control channel further indicates that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type, including:
    所述下行控制信道承载下行控制信息,所述下行控制信息包括用于指示所述系统信息的类型为所述第一类型或所述第二类型的信息;或,The downlink control channel carries downlink control information, and the downlink control information includes information indicating that the type of the system information is the first type or the second type; or,
    所述下行控制信道的加扰序列为第一序列,用于指示所述系统信息的类型为所述第一类型,或,所述下行控制信道的加扰序列为第二序列,用于指示所述系统信息的类型为所述第二类型。The scrambling sequence of the downlink control channel is a first sequence, which is used to indicate that the type of the system information is the first type, or, the scrambling sequence of the downlink control channel is a second sequence, which is used to indicate the type of the system information The type of the system information is the second type.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 18, further comprising:
    在所述第五信息所配置的上行信道上,发送终端设备的标识,所述上行信道包括上行控制信道或上行共享信道。The identifier of the terminal device is sent on the uplink channel configured by the fifth information, where the uplink channel includes an uplink control channel or an uplink shared channel.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 19, wherein,
    所述上行信道包括所述上行控制信道,所述上行控制信道用于请求定位;或,The uplink channel includes the uplink control channel, and the uplink control channel is used to request positioning; or,
    所述上行信道包括所述上行共享信道,所述方法还包括:从所述终端设备接收请求信息,所述请求信息用于请求定位。The uplink channel includes the uplink shared channel, and the method further includes: receiving request information from the terminal device, where the request information is used to request positioning.
  21. 根据权利要求16~20任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述上行参考信号是根据所述终端设备的标识确定的。The method according to any one of claims 16-20, wherein the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identity of the terminal equipment.
  22. 根据权利要求16~21任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述上行参考信号是根据所述终端设备的标识和所述定位信息确定的。The method according to any one of claims 16-21, wherein the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identity of the terminal device and the positioning information.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其特征在于,所述定位信息包括如下一项或多项:The method according to claim 22, wherein the positioning information includes one or more of the following:
    所述上行参考信号的带宽信息;bandwidth information of the uplink reference signal;
    所述上行参考信号的周期;the period of the uplink reference signal;
    所述上行参考信号占用的符号个数;或,The number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal; or,
    所述上行参考信号在频域的梳齿信息。Comb tooth information of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain.
  24. 根据权利要求21~23任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to any one of claims 21-23, characterized in that,
    所述上行参考信号的序列标识与所述终端设备的标识相同;或,The sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is the same as the identifier of the terminal device; or,
    所述上行参考信号的序列标识是对所述终端设备的标识取模得到的;或,The sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is obtained by moduloing the identifier of the terminal device; or,
    所述上行参考信号的序列标识是所述终端设备的标识的一部分。The sequence identifier of the uplink reference signal is part of the identifier of the terminal device.
  25. 根据权利要求21~24任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述上行参考信号的时域位置和/或频域位置是根据所述终端设备的标识确定的。The method according to any one of claims 21-24, characterized in that the time-domain position and/or frequency-domain position of the uplink reference signal is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device.
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的方法,其特征在于,所述上行参考信号的时域位置包括所述上行参考信号所在的时隙,所述上行参考信号所在的时隙的编号是根据所述终端设备的标识确定的,所述上行参考信号所在的时隙的编号是所述上行参考信号所在的时隙在一个系统帧内的编号。The method according to claim 25, wherein the time domain position of the uplink reference signal includes the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located, and the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located is based on the number of the terminal device The number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located is the number of the time slot where the uplink reference signal is located in one system frame.
  27. 根据权利要求25或26所述的方法,其特征在于,所述上行参考信号的时域位置包括所述上行参考信号的起始符号,其中,所述上行参考信号的起始符号的编号是根据所述终端设备的标识和第一信息确定的,所述第一信息包括所述上行参考信号占用的符号个数和/或一个时隙包括的符号个数。The method according to claim 25 or 26, wherein the time domain position of the uplink reference signal includes the start symbol of the uplink reference signal, wherein the number of the start symbol of the uplink reference signal is based on Determined by the identifier of the terminal device and first information, where the first information includes the number of symbols occupied by the uplink reference signal and/or the number of symbols included in a time slot.
  28. 根据权利要求25~27任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述上行参考信号的频域位置包括所述上行参考信号的频域起始位置,所述上行参考信号的频域起始位置所在的子载波的编号是根据所述终端设备的标识和所述上行参考信号在频域的梳齿信息确定的。The method according to any one of claims 25 to 27, wherein the frequency domain position of the uplink reference signal includes a frequency domain start position of the uplink reference signal, and the frequency domain start position of the uplink reference signal is The number of the subcarrier where the position is located is determined according to the identifier of the terminal device and the comb information of the uplink reference signal in the frequency domain.
  29. 根据权利要求16~28任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 16-28, characterized in that the method further comprises:
    向核心网设备发送第一定位请求,所述第一定位请求包括所述终端设备的标识,用于请求对所述终端设备进行定位。Sending a first positioning request to the core network device, where the first positioning request includes the identifier of the terminal device, and is used to request positioning of the terminal device.
  30. 根据权利要求16~29任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 16-29, characterized in that the method further comprises:
    对所述上行参考信号进行测量,得到测量结果;measuring the uplink reference signal to obtain a measurement result;
    向定位服务器发送所述测量结果,所述测量结果用于对所述终端设备进行定位。Send the measurement result to a positioning server, where the measurement result is used for positioning the terminal device.
  31. 根据权利要求16~30任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述上行参考信号为定位SRS。The method according to any one of claims 16-30, wherein the uplink reference signal is a positioning SRS.
  32. 根据权利要求16~31任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备仅用于定位。The method according to any one of claims 16-31, wherein the terminal device is only used for positioning.
  33. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器和存储器;其中,所述存储器用于存储一个或多个计算机程序,所述一个或多个计算机程序包括计算机执行指令,当所述通信装置运行时,所述处理器执行所述存储器存储的所述一个或多个计算机程序,以使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求1~15中任一项所述的方法,或使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求16~32中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized in that it includes a processor and a memory; wherein the memory is used to store one or more computer programs, and the one or more computer programs include computer-executable instructions, when the communication device is running , the processor executes the one or more computer programs stored in the memory, so that the communication device executes the method according to any one of claims 1-15, or makes the communication device execute the method described in A method as claimed in any one of claims 16-32.
  34. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1~15中任一项所述的方法,或使得所述计算机执行如权利要求16~32中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes any one of claims 1-15. The method described in claim 1, or causing the computer to execute the method described in any one of claims 16-32.
  35. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序,当所述 计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1~15中任一项所述的方法,或使得所述计算机执行如权利要求16~32中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, characterized in that the computer program product includes a computer program, and when the computer program is run on a computer, the computer is made to perform the method according to any one of claims 1-15, Or make the computer execute the method according to any one of claims 16-32.
PCT/CN2022/115217 2021-11-17 2022-08-26 Communication method and apparatus WO2023087831A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202111359800.9 2021-11-17
CN202111359800.9A CN116156522A (en) 2021-11-17 2021-11-17 Communication method and device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023087831A1 true WO2023087831A1 (en) 2023-05-25

Family

ID=86351074

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/115217 WO2023087831A1 (en) 2021-11-17 2022-08-26 Communication method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN116156522A (en)
WO (1) WO2023087831A1 (en)

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20190058562A1 (en) * 2017-08-17 2019-02-21 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method for configuring sounding reference signal in wireless communication system
CN111133790A (en) * 2017-09-28 2020-05-08 华为技术有限公司 System information change indication method and device

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20190058562A1 (en) * 2017-08-17 2019-02-21 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method for configuring sounding reference signal in wireless communication system
CN111133790A (en) * 2017-09-28 2020-05-08 华为技术有限公司 System information change indication method and device

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
CMCC: "Considerations on Positioning in RRC_INACTIVE state", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 MEETING #116 ELECTRONIC, R2-2111076, 22 October 2021 (2021-10-22), XP052067514 *
OPPO: "Summary for AI 8.11.3 on positioning in RRC_INACTIVE", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 MEETING #116 ELECTRONIC, R2-2111251, 28 October 2021 (2021-10-28), XP052071802 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN116156522A (en) 2023-05-23

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US10165046B2 (en) Method and system for transmitting data among peer stations in a decentralized manner with high channel efficiency
WO2021243580A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting downlink positioning reference signal, and storage medium
CN105075385B (en) Network-assisted UE detection in direct mode UE-to-UE communication
JP2016201663A (en) Device and method
WO2020220910A1 (en) Method and apparatus for handling sidelink reports
WO2022002165A1 (en) Harq-ack transmission method and apparatus
JP2024026239A (en) Method and apparatus for two-step random access procedure
CN107079488B (en) Random access method and device
US20160323819A1 (en) System and Method for Data Communication in a Decentralized and Power Efficient Manner
WO2022141184A1 (en) Method for configuring uplink reference signal resource and related apparatus
CN108141895B (en) Method for accessing User Equipment (UE) to network, network equipment and first UE
US20220369271A1 (en) Positioning procedures for user equipments in inactive state
WO2023087831A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2023088039A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2018086472A1 (en) Service-oriented method and apparatus for dynamic access controlof mtc device
WO2021239113A1 (en) Data transmission method and apparatus
WO2019041261A1 (en) Communication method and device
WO2022041229A1 (en) Method and apparatus for clustering of terminal device
WO2023236703A1 (en) Positioning method and apparatus, storage medium, and chip system
WO2023197783A1 (en) Paging method and apparatus
WO2022236473A1 (en) Information sending method and apparatus, information receiving method and apparatus, and system
WO2024082849A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2022257733A1 (en) Communication processing method and apparatus in network sharing scenario
WO2021156984A1 (en) Terminal device and wireless communication method
WO2023206480A1 (en) Positioning method and apparatus for absolute location, device, and medium

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22894372

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1